How to Easily Choose the Right Interfacing for Any Sewing Project

choosing the right interfacing

Understanding interfacing can completely change the way your sewing projects look and feel. The good news is, it really doesn’t have to be complicated.

Have you ever finished a sewing project and thought…why:

  • does this bag feel floppy?
  • is this collar wrinkled?
  • does this zipper area stretch out?
  • does this project just look a little… homemade?

Chances are, the problem may not be your sewing skills at all. It could simply be the type of interfacing or stabilizer you used.


In this beginner-friendly guide, I’m going to:

  • simplify the different types of interfacing and fabric stabilizers
  • explain what they’re used for, and help you decide which one works best for your sewing projects.
interfacing bag

What Is Interfacing?

Interfacing is a material that is added to fabric to give it more:

  • structure

  • stability

  • support

  • durability

  • shape

It is commonly used in:

  • collars

  • cuffs

  • waistbands

  • bags and pouches

  • button plackets

  • zipper areas

  • quilted projects

  • home decor items

Without a stabilizer, many sewing projects can feel limp, stretchy, or unstable.

interfacing

The Most Important Rule About Interfacing

 

Match the weight of the stabilizer to the weight of the fabric.

Examples:

  • Lightweight cotton fabric → lightweight interfacing

  • Medium-weight fabric → medium-weight interfacing

  • Knit fabric → knit interfacing

  • Structured bags → heavier stabilizer or foam

Using a stabilizer that is too heavy can make the fabric stiff and unnatural.

If you use an interfacing that is too light, it may not provide enough support.

interfacing store
knit interfacing

Types of Interfacing and Stabilizers – Woven 

There are many different brands and products available, but most stabilizers fall into a few basic categories.

You can purchase them in fabric stores or online. They can be bought on the bolt, by the yard, or packaged.

1. Woven Fusible Interfacing

Woven interfacing behaves much like fabric because it actually has a grainline.

It adds support while still allowing fabric to drape naturally.

Best Uses:

  • shirt collars

  • cuffs

  • button plackets

  • garment sewing

  • lightweight cotton projects

Why Sewists Love It

Woven interfacing gives projects a more professional finish without making them overly stiff.

One of the most popular types is:

  • Pellon SF101 Shape-Flex

This is a favorite for many garment and bag sewists because it adds soft structure while keeping the fabric flexible.

non-woven interfacing

2. Non-Woven Fusible Interfacing

Non-woven interfacing has more of a paper-like texture and does not have a grainline.

It is one of the most common types of interfacing for beginners.

Best Uses:

  • zipper pouches

  • craft projects

  • simple bags

  • quilting cotton projects

Things to Know

Non-woven interfacing is inexpensive and easy to use, but heavier versions can sometimes feel stiff.

This is a great everyday interfacing for many sewing projects.

knit interfacing

3. Knit Interfacing (Tricot Interfacing)

Knit interfacing is designed specifically for stretchy fabrics.

Unlike regular interfacing, it stretches with the fabric rather than fighting it.KNIT INTERFACING

Best Uses:

  • t-shirts

  • knit necklines

  • stretchy hems

  • zipper areas on knit fabric

Why It Matters

Using regular interfacing on knit fabric can make the fabric stiff and distorted.

Knit interfacing helps stabilize the fabric while still maintaining stretch and comfort.

4. Fusible Fleece

Fusible fleece adds softness, padding, and body rather than stiffness.

It creates a soft, structured look that works beautifully for many sewing projects.

Best Uses:

  • tote bags

  • zipper pouches

  • placemats

  • table runners

  • cosmetic bags

What It Does Best

Fusible fleece helps projects feel soft and padded while still holding their shape.

If you want a project to feel cushioned instead of stiff, fusible fleece is a great option.

foam stabilizer

5. Foam Stabilizer

Foam stabilizer is thicker and more structured than fleece.

It creates dimension and helps projects stand upright.

Best Uses:

  • structured bags

  • eyeglass cases
  • laptop bags

  • standing baskets

  • travel bags

Why It’s Popular

Foam stabilizer gives sewing projects that professional store-bought appearance, many sewists are

Fusible vs. Sew-In Interfacing

Interfacing generally comes in two forms:

Fusible Interfacing

This type has adhesive on one side that bonds to fabric with heat from an iron.

Pros:

  • easy to apply

  • keeps layers together

  • beginner friendly

Cons:

  • can bubble if applied incorrectly

Sew-In Interfacing

This type is sewn into the project instead of fused with heat.

Pros:

  • great for delicate fabrics

  • no risk of bubbling

  • softer drape

Cons:

  • requires more sewing steps

Most beginners prefer fusible interfacing because it is faster and easier to use.

interfacing comparrison

How to Apply Fusible Interfacing Correctly

***BE SURE TO FOLLOW THE INSTRUCTIONS THAT COME WITH THE INTERFACING/STABILIZER. (Some can be different).

One of the biggest frustrations with interfacing is bubbling or wrinkling after fusing.

1. Identify the Glue Side

The rough or bumpy side is usually the adhesive side.

Place the glue side against the wrong side of the fabric.

2. Press — Don’t Iron

Instead of sliding the iron back and forth:

  • press down firmly

  • hold for 10–15 seconds

  • lift and move to the next section

Sliding the iron can stretch and distort the fabric.

3. Use a Pressing Cloth

A pressing cloth helps protect fabric and prevents adhesive from transferring to the iron.

4. Let It Cool Completely

After fusing, allow the fabric to cool flat before moving it.

This helps the adhesive bond properly.

Tip for applying fusible interfacing to pattern pieces. (bucket hats, bag, and pouch panels, etc.)

tip

Here is a great tip that really makes a huge difference when applying fusible interfacing.

  1. Cut a piece of interfacing into a rectangle slightly larger than the pattern piece.

  2. Now, cut a piece of fabric the same size.

  3. Cut out the paper pattern piece.

  4. Place the interfacing with the bumpy side FACING DOWN.

  5. Trace around the pattern piece.

  6. Turn the interfacing so the bumpy side is FACING UP.

  7. Place the fabric onto the interfacing with the RIGHT SIDE FACING UP.

  8. Start pressing, not ironing, from the center out. Making sure to cover the whole area.

  9. Test to see if it has completely adhered, and let it cool.

  10. Now cut out the pattern pieces, and you’ll have a nice crisp edge and all layers lined up. Yay!

Common Interfacing Mistakes

  • Using Interfacing That Is Too Heavy

This can make projects stiff, bulky, or difficult to sew.

  • Using Lightweight Interfacing on Heavy Fabric

Heavy fabrics may still feel floppy if the stabilizer is too light.

  • Stretching Fabric While Fusing

    This can distort the shape of the project.

  • Skipping Test Swatches

    Always test interfacing on a scrap piece of fabric first.

    This helps you check:

    • stiffness

    • drape

    • shrinkage

    • adhesion

My Favorite Everyday Stabilizers

These are a few stabilizers I personally reach for over and over:

For Garments

For Bags and Pouches

For Knit Fabrics

For Structured Bags

Final Thoughts

Interfacing may seem confusing at first, but once you understand a few basic categories, choosing the right stabilizer becomes much easier.

The right choice can instantly make your sewing projects:

  • look more professional

  • hold their shape better

  • last longer

  • feel more polished

And honestly, it can save a lot of frustration along the way.

Once you start experimenting with different stabilizers, you’ll quickly discover which ones work best for the types of projects you love to sew most.

Happy sewing!

Share:

Facebook
Twitter
Pinterest

Connect:

Picture of Jan Howell

Jan Howell

Whether it’s a new recipe, a fun craft, or some handy tips for your garden and home, I hope to empower and inspire you with skills that you can use to create joy, improved health, and to do it in a simple way.

Read More

How to Make a DIY Towel Scarf / Easy Beginner Sewing Tutorial

DIY towl scarf
DIY Towel Scarf

If you’re constantly losing your kitchen towel, having it slip off your shoulder, or grabbing for it only to find… nothing—this simple sewing project is going to fix that for good.

This DIY towel scarf keeps your towel right where you need it—hands-free, comfortable, and ready for whatever kitchen mess comes your way.

No slipping. No searching. No frustration.

And the best part? It’s quick, beginner-friendly, and a great way to use up fabric scraps.

Why You’ll Love This Towel Scarf

  • Keeps your towel right at your fingertips
  • Comfortable to wear around your neck
  • Great for drying hands, wiping counters, and cooking cleanup
  • Uses scrap fabric
  • Makes a fantastic gift 
  • Once you make one… you’ll probably end up making a stack.

Supplies You’ll Need

A Note About Towel Size

Kitchen towels vary quite a bit, but most fall in this range:

  • Width: 15″–18″
  • Length: 25″–28″

The sample shown uses a 16″ x 26″ towel.

You can use:

  • Terry cloth
  • Linen
  • Any towel you like

Remove any tags before starting.

diy towel scarf

Step 1: Cut and Prep the Towel

  1. Fold the towel in half lengthwise
  2. Cut along the fold to create two pieces
  3. Trim edges to clean up uneven or fuzzy sides

Step 2: Create the Towel Pleats

This is what helps the towel sit nicely inside the neck band.diy towel scarf

  1. Fold the towel in half and mark the center

  2. Open it up (right side facing up)

  3. Bring the side edge to the center point, press fold.

  4. Fold it again onto itself so the hemmed edge is lined up with the folded towel underneath, to create a ayered pleat.

  5. Flip the towel over and fold again to line up with the center point. Pin in place

Repeat on the other side.

👉 Pin everything in place.

Helpful tip:
Do a quick basting stitch about 1″ from the raw edge to hold everything together. It’s optional—but honestly, it saves headaches later. Stitch length 4-5


 


Step 3: Measure and Cut the Neck Piece

To get the measurement of the fabric for the neck piece, measure the width of your folded towel.

Width

Example:

  • Folded towel width = 4″

Now calculate:

  • Double it → 4″ x 2 = 8″

  • Add 1¼” for bulk (or 1½” for thicker towels)

👉 Final cut width: 9¼” wide. 

Length:

You can make the scarf as long as you want. The average length is about 43 inches. I like mine a little longer and cut it to 44 inches. 

  • Cut your fabric 42″–44″ long (standard fabric width on a bolt works perfectly)

Trim off selvage edges before cutting.

The neck piece measures 44 x 9 1/4 inches. 

diy scarf towel neck piece

Step 4: Sew the Neck Band Tube

  1. Place the fabric right sides together horizontally.

  2. Fold the bottom edge to meet the top edge. (There should be 4 layers of fabric).diy towel scarf
  3. Measure 3″ from the top left folded edges to mark the tube opening in the center. MAKE A SMALL CLIP AT THIS POINT THROUGH ALL LAYERS.

  4. Unfold and fold in half horizontally again, matching up clipped points.towel scarf
  5. Pin in place. (Use different colored pins to mark the opening)towel scarf

  6. Sew along the long edge with a ½” seam allowance

    • Backstitch at start and end

    • Skip the 3″ opening

towl scarf ironPress the seam open.

I LOVE this little mini iron for things like this!

towel scarf

Step 5: Insert the Towel (Magic Step ✨)

This is the fun/awkward-but-brilliant part.

  1. Fold the bottom edge of the towel up a bit, then attach a safety pin to the end of the towel.

  2. Feed the towel through the fabric tube.

  3. Use a turning tool or stick to push it in.

  4. Flatten the towel, bringing its folds against the fabric tube’s fold. Align center points carefully.

  5. Pin in place

Repeat for both ends.

towl scarf

Step 6: Stitch the Ends

  • Sew each end with a ½” seam allowance

  • Backstitch at the beginning and end of seams.

  • Trim seam allowance slightly

Then turn everything right side out by pulling the towel through the opening you left unsewn.

👉 You’ll end up with a super clean finish—no bulky overlaps.

Step 7: Close the Opening + Shape the Neck

  1. Flatten out the neck piece with the opening edge at the bottom.

  2. Press the edges.

  3. Fold the neck piece in half, lining up the opening and folded edges. (Open edge on top).

  4. Press and place pins on the opening edges.  
  5. Clip in place.
  6. Topstitch from pin to pin close to the edge (about ⅛”). Backstitching at the beginning and end of the seam.

  7. This also helps narrow the neck for a more comfortable fit

towel scarf

Step 8: Topstitch 

For a polished look, topstitch the edge of the neck piece where the towel meets the fabric.

  • Stitch ⅛” from the edge

  • Add a second row 1/4 from the previous stitching.

It gives it that “store-bought but better” finish.

towel scarf label

Step 9: Add a Label (Optional)

If you love adding personality to your projects:

  • Place a label at the center back of the neck

It’s a small detail—but it makes a big difference.

Final Thoughts

That’s it!

A quick, practical, and actually useful sewing project you’ll use every single day.

Great Gift Idea 🎁

These make perfect:

  • Mother’s Day gifts

  • Housewarming gifts

  • Handmade kitchen sets

Pair one with:

 

Have fun sewing!

jan3

Share:

Facebook
Twitter
Pinterest

Connect:

Picture of Jan Howell

Jan Howell

Whether it’s a new recipe, a fun craft, or some handy tips for your garden and home, I hope to empower and inspire you with skills that you can use to create joy, improved health, and to do it in a simple way.

Read More

How to Make A Pentagon Fabric Ball / Easy DIY Baby Gift Idea

DIY Pentagon Ball

If you’re looking for a soft, cozy sewing project that uses up fabric scraps and makes an adorable handmade gift, these Pentagon Fabric Balls are just the thing.

They may look a little tricky—after all, you’re sewing a ball from pentagons—but don’t let that scare you. Once you understand the construction, it’s actually a simple and very enjoyable project.

These fabric balls are soft, squishy, and perfect for babies and little hands. You can make them in different sizes, use quilting cotton, or even upcycle felted wool sweaters for a more textured look.

So grab your fabric scraps and let’s get started.

pentagon ball diy

Supplies You’ll Need

GET THE FULL BABY BALL BUNDLE HERE

pentagon ball

Cutting the Pentagon BallcPieces

Start by cutting out your pentagon shapes.

You’ll need:

12 pentagons total (You can cut these using fabric scissors, but a rotary cutter and ruler make the process faster and more precise—especially when cutting multiple layers.

Time-saving tip:
Stack up to six layers of cotton fabric and cut them at once with a sharp rotary blade.

And of course… don’t forget to save your scraps for future projects. 😊

Arrange Your Layout

Before sewing, lay out your 12 pentagons on the table in the arrangement you want.

Helpful tip:

Make the top and bottom center pentagons the same color.
This makes assembly much easier and helps keep everything aligned as you sew.

Seam Allowance & Machine Setup

Use a ¼ inch seam allowance.

Follow your machine’s seam guide or use a quarter-inch presser foot.

Install a universal needle size 80, or if you are sewing on knit fabric-you’ll need a stretch or ballpoint needle.

I like to place my arranged pentagon floweres next to my machine for easy access the to pieces.

Step 1: Sew the First “Flower” Unit

Take one center pentagon and begin sewing the surrounding five pentagons to it.

Important:
You will only sew the bottom edge of each pentagon—and you must start and stop ¼ inch from each edge.

Do not sew all the way to the corners. 

Why this matters:
Leaving that ¼-inch gap allows the pieces to fold and join properly as the ball forms.

diy pentagon ballRepeat this process until all five outer pentagons are attached around the center.

Your piece will resemble a fabric flower.

Hand Sewing Option

Prefer hand stitching? This project works beautifully that way too.

Use a backstitch:

  1. Take a small stitch forward.
  2. Go back halfway into the previous stitch.
  3. Continue forward again.
    This creates a strong, secure seam similar to machine stitching.
  4. Knot your thread by wrapping the needle through a loop before pulling tight.

Step 2: Sew the Side Seams

Now sew the side edges of the pentagons together.

  1. Place right sides together.
  2. Start and stop at the same ¼ inch points.pentagon ball
  3. Backstitch at each end.
    As you work around, your piece will begin forming a small bowl shape.
  4. Repeat this entire process to create a second bowl with the remaining pentagons.

Step 3: Join the Two Halves

Place the two bowls right sides together. Here’s the key alignment tip:

You won’t match point to point.

Instead:

Match the point of one pentagon to the valley seam of the other half.

Sew one edge at a time, starting and stopping at the ¼ inch marks.

It may feel awkward as you go—but trust the process. It comes together beautifully.

Continue sewing around…But leave one opening unsewn for turning and stuffing.

Step 4: Turn & Stuff

  1. Turn the ball right side out through the opening.
  2. Use a turning stick to gently push out the points.
  3. Stuff with fiberfill until halfway full.
  4. Optional (but adorable):
  5. Add a jingle bell inside for a soft rattle sound—perfect for babies.
  6. Finish stuffing until the ball is firm and evenly filled.

Step 5: Close the Opening

Use a ladder stitch (invisible stitch) to close the gap.

How to: Stitch inside one fold. Cross directly to the opposite fold.
Repeat back and forth. (Small stitches = cleaner finish.)

When you reach the end: Make a knot. Insert the needle into the ball. Bring it out elsewhere and clip the thread. The tail disappears inside.

DIY Pentagon Ball

Finished Pentagon Fabric Ball

And that’s it—you’ve got a soft, squishy pentagon fabric ball.

Make them for:

  • Baby toys
  • Shower gifts
  • Scrap-busting projects
    Sensory balls (with bells inside)
  • Holiday ornaments (smaller size)

Pattern & Size Options

I’ve included a link below where you can get the pattern that includes:

Share:

Facebook
Twitter
Pinterest

Connect:

Picture of Jan Howell

Jan Howell

Whether it’s a new recipe, a fun craft, or some handy tips for your garden and home, I hope to empower and inspire you with skills that you can use to create joy, improved health, and to do it in a simple way.

Read More

Related Posts

How To Easily Transform Jeans That Are Too Tight Into Comfortable Pants

Are your jeans too tight at the waist? Do they slide down under your belly or dig in when you sit?

In this tutorial, I’m going to show you how to transform too-tight jeans into a comfortable, flattering pair of pants by replacing the waistband with stretch fabric from upcycled leggings or yoga pants.

tight jeans

If you’ve experienced body changes — whether from pregnancy, menopause, weight fluctuations, or lower abdominal fullness — you know how frustrating it can be when your favorite jeans suddenly don’t fit the way they used to.

Before you toss them into the donation pile, I’ve got a simple solution. It’s easier than you think — and the comfort level is a total game changer.

tight jeans

Why This Alteration Works So Well

Traditional denim waistbands have very little give. That structured fit is great… until your body changes.

By swapping the waistband for a knit stretch fabric, you:

  • Add flexibility and comfort
  • Eliminate digging and pinching
  • Prevent jeans from sliding down
  • Extend the life of your favorite pairs
  • Create a custom fit for your body
  • And the best part? It still looks polished enough to wear out of the house — not just lounge around in.

Who This Is Perfect For

This alteration is ideal if you’re experiencing:

  • Pregnancy or postpartum body changes
  • Menopause belly or hormonal weight shifts
  • Lower abdominal fullness or bloating
  • Medical or health-related body changes
  • General comfort preferences
  • Or honestly… if you just want jeans that feel as comfy as yoga pants. No judgment here.

Supplies You’ll Need

  • A pair of jeans that feel too tight at the waistthrit store
  • Stretchy leggings or yoga pants (for the waistband) If you don’t want to sacrifice a good pair of yoga pants or leggings – go to the thrift store. You can usally find a ton of them at a very low price.
  • Sewing machine
  • Scissors
  • Pins or fabric clips
  • Measuring tape
  • Optional: Serger

1- Remove the Original Waistband From the Jeans

I recommend trying on the tight jeans and determining at which point the pants become tight.

This is where you’ll want to attach the stretchy waistband. Mark this place with a pin or chalk mark.

Carefully cut off the waistband of your jeans.

If there are rivets in the jeans, try cutting just below them and through the belt loop.

tight jeans seam ripperRemove the remaining belt loops by using a seam ripper.

 

Cut a small portion of the zipper off the top to avoid breaking needles while sewing.

Clip or pin the pocket fabric and jean fly down in place.

tight jeans leggings

2- Cut the waistband portion from your leggings or stretchy pants.

Try on the leggings to see how low you need to cut the pants for comfort over your belly.

Mark with a pin. (I find that measuring about 4 ½ to 5 inches is about average.

Using a piece of chalk or fabric marker, draw a cutting line all the way around the leggings.

Cut along the chalk line.

tight jeans serger

3- Finish the cut edges.

Finish the cut edges of the jeans and stretchy waistband by sewing all the way around with a sewing machine or serger.

zigag stitch (A serger works great, but if you don’t have one, just sew a wide zigzag stitch along the edge). 

tight jens waistband

4 -Attach the New Waistband

Find the center front and back of the stretchy pants if it is not obvious and mark with chalk or pins.

tight jens waistbandPin the stretchy waistband to the jeans, lining up center points.

Overlap the stretchy waistband on top of the jeans by about 3/8 inch. Pin in place.

Before sewing the final stitching, I like to baste them together using a long straight stitch. 4-5 in length.

Because you’re attaching knit to woven fabric, you may need to gently stretch the waistband between points. That is what you want.

After basting in place, I like to try on the pants to see if any adjustments are needed.

tight jeans top zigzagIf you’re good to go, then use a zigzag stitch (5 width, 3-4 in length) all the way around.

After basting in place, I like to try on the pants to see if any adjustments are needed.

If you’re good to go, then use a zigzag stitch (5 width, 3-4 in length) all the way around.

tight jeans zipper

6 –Finish Off the Cut Zipper

To finish off the cut zipper, so the zipper pull doesn’t fall off or gape open, you can whip-stitch the top of the zipper together using a double-threaded needle.

tight jeans hack

You now have a pair of jeans that look like denim… but feel like lounge wear. Best of both worlds.

tight jeans to comfortThis project is also a great way to repurpose:

  • Old leggings
  • Worn yoga pants
  • Stretch knit scraps

So instead of tossing them, you’re giving them new life in a super practical way.

Final Thoughts

Body changes happen — to all of us. Clothing should adapt to you, not the other way around.

This easy waistband alteration lets you keep wearing the jeans you love while making them comfortable enough for real life — sitting, moving, bending, and breathing.

If you’ve never tried altering waistbands before, this is a great beginner project that delivers instant results.

Share:

Facebook
Twitter
Pinterest

Connect:

Picture of Jan Howell

Jan Howell

Whether it’s a new recipe, a fun craft, or some handy tips for your garden and home, I hope to empower and inspire you with skills that you can use to create joy, improved health, and to do it in a simple way.

Read More

How To Sew a Pillowcase Using French Seams or a Serger / Easy Sewing Project

diy PILLOWCASE
pillowcase

If you’re new to sewing, making a pillowcase is one of the best beginner projects you can start with. It’s simple, practical, and gives you the chance to practice straight seams, pressing, and finishing techniques.

In this tutorial, I’ll show you two easy methods for sewing a basic pillowcase:

A French seam method (great if you don’t have a serger)
A Serger method (fast and professional)
Both techniques create a clean, durable finish that holds up beautifully in the wash — no fraying edges here!

Supplies You’ll Need

  • 1 yard fabric (standard-size pillowcase)
  • Straight pins
  • Seam gauge
  • Scissors
  • Rotary cutter, mat, and ruler (optional but helpful)
  • Iron
  • Sewing machine
  • Safety pin (optional tip)
  • Serger (for the serger method)
  • Fabric suggestions:
  • Quilting cotton (most common)
  • Flannel
  • Fleece
  • Silky fabrics

fabric boltMost woven fabrics come 43–44 inches wide, which works perfectly for this project.

Pillowcase Measurements

Standard Pillowcase:

Cut fabric to 36 x 44 inches

Queen Pillowcase:

Cut fabric to 39 x 44 inches

King Pillowcase:

Cut fabric to 42 x 44 inches

Click on the link below to get the free pillowcase cutting guide.

Preparing Your Fabric

If using flannel or cotton, prewash first to prevent shrinkage.

1- Fold fabric in half (salvage edges together).

2- Trim off salvage edges (about ½”).
3- Square up the cut edges using your mat grid to a length of 36 inches.

You should now have a rectangle measuring:

36 x 43-44 inches

Helpful Tip:
Attach a safety pin to the salvage edge so you can easily remember which side is the pillowcase edge.

Pre-Fold the Cuff

Before sewing seams, prep the pillowcase opening:

  1. Fold the wide edge down ½ inch — press.

  2. Fold another 4 inches — press well.

french seam pillowcase

Method 1: French Seam Pillowcase

French seams enclose all raw edges inside the seam — perfect if you don’t own a serger.

Step 1 – Sew First Seam

  1. Place the fabric wrong sides together.

  2. Keep the 2.1-inch folded down.

  3. Pin along the side and the bottom.

  4. (Optional) Insert a fabric tag into the side seam. (see video for more details).

Sew down the side and bottom, using a ¼ inch seam allowance. Backstitch at the beginning and end of the seam. 

Step 2 – Turn & Press

  1. Turn the pillowcase wrong side out.

  2. Push out corners with a turning tool.

  3. Roll seams flat with fingers.

  4. Press well.

Step 3 – Sew Second Seam

Sew again along side and bottom using a ⅜ inch seam allowance.

This encloses all raw edges inside the seam.

Turn the right side out and press.

You’ll now see a beautifully finished interior — no fraying!

Step 4 – Finish the Cuff

  1. Refold the pressed cuff.

  2. Pin in place.

  3. Topstitch along the folded edge.

Using an edge-stitch foot or a blind hem foot. This helps keep your seam perfectly straight.

Backstitch at the beginning and end.

Optional: Add trim, such as lace or rickrack, to the seam for decoration.

sewing tips serger

Method 2: Serger Pillowcase

This method is faster and great for batch sewing.

If using flannel or cotton, prewash first to prevent shrinkage.

Cut fabric to:

43” x 40” (Queen-size example)

Step 1 – Pre-Fold Cuff

Same as before:

  • Fold ½ inch — press

  • Fold 4 inches — press

  • Open the folds, leaving the ½ inch press

Step 2 – Sew Side Seam

Serger Corner Tip

Before serging the corner:  Pre-cut the seam allowance just on the bottom corner, about ½ inches.

This allows you to pivot cleanly without bunching.

  1. Place the fabric right sides together.

  2. Align edges carefully — avoid twisting.

  3. Pin in place.

Serge the side seam using a ½ inch seam allowance.

Step 3 – Enclose the Cuff Seam

Turn the pillowcase right-side facing out.

Refold the cuff along pressed lines so the serged seam is enclosed inside the fold — just like store-bought pillowcases.

Pin and press if needed.


Step 4 – Topstitch

Topstitch along the cuff edge using an edge foot or blind hem foot, for guidance.

(Optional: Add a fabric tag in the seam as shown in Method 1.)

Finished Pillowcase

You now have a beautifully finished pillowcase with:

  • Enclosed seams

  • Professional cuff

  • Optional decorative trim

Make a second one for a matching set — they sew up quickly!


Beginner Sewing Tips

  • Always square your fabric before cutting.

  • Press every step — it makes a huge difference.

  • Use French seams if you don’t own a serger.

  • Flannel makes especially cozy pillowcases.

  • Add tags or trims for a custom touch.


Learn how to make your own custom tags/labels – HERE


 

Have fun sewing!

jan3

Share:

Facebook
Twitter
Pinterest

Connect:

Picture of Jan Howell

Jan Howell

Whether it’s a new recipe, a fun craft, or some handy tips for your garden and home, I hope to empower and inspire you with skills that you can use to create joy, improved health, and to do it in a simple way.

Read More

How To Make a Vinyl Zipper Pouch / Easy Sewing Project

diy Vinyl zipper pouch
DIY vinyl zipper pouch

Clear vinyl zipper pouches are one of those projects that once you make one… you’ll wonder how you lived without them.

They’re quick, practical, and ridiculously useful.

You can see exactly what’s inside (no more digging), they’re sturdy, and they work for everything from sewing notions and crochet hooks to travel art supplies and cosmetics.

In this tutorial, I’ll walk you through

  • How to sew a clear vinyl zipper pouch
  • Share vinyl‑sewing tips that make the process stress‑free
  • and show you how to add a flat (boxed) bottom so the bag stands up on its own.

Has sewing with vinyl ever intimidated you? No worries. With the right tricks, it’s actually fun to sew with.

Why You’ll Love These Vinyl Zipper Pouches

  • You can see what’s inside at a glance
  • Great for organizing sewing, crochet, or art supplies
  • Perfect travel pouches (TSA‑friendly 👀)
  • Beginner‑friendly with the right tips
  • Easily customizable with fabric, bias tape, and labels
  • I’ll show you three popular sizes, plus a smaller version with a flat bottom.

Vinyl Zipper Pouch Finished Sizes

You can make these pouches in any size, but here are the most useful and popular ones:

  • Large pouch – 10 wide x 19 tall inches – great for bulkier supplies
  • Medium pouch – 7 ½ wide x 14 tall – perfect everyday organizer (demonstrated in this tutorial)
  • Small pouch – 9 ½ wide x 9 tall- ideal for cosmetics, notions, or travel items

Supplies You’ll Need

Helpful Extras (Optional but Handy)

1-Cutting & Prepping the Vinyl

Vinyl can be stiff and wrinkly—especially in cooler temperatures.
Quick tip: If your vinyl won’t lie flat, gently warm it with a hair dryer on low heat. Don’t overdo it—you want it relaxed, not melted.

Cut one piece of vinyl to the size specified in the size chart.

Medium-sized bag: 7.5 x 14 inches.

2-Preparing the Fabric Zipper Panels

  • Cut a fabric strip twice the width of the pouch and 5″ tall. (For the medium bag: 15″ x 5″)
  • Lightly spray with starch for crisp folds. (Optional)
  • Fold in half lengthwise and press
  • Fold raw edges into the center and press
  • Fold in half again and press
  • Cut the strip in half to create two zipper panels.

3-Attaching the Fabric Panels to the Vinyl

  • Slide the vinyl into the folded fabric panel
  • Clip in place with Wonder Clips *DO NOT USE PINS ON VINYL!
  • Topstitch ⅛” from the edge

Lengthen your stitch to 3.0–3.5 for a cleaner topstitch

Repeat for both ends.

4-Installing the Zippervinyl zipper pouch

  • Fold the pouch panel in half horizontally and mark the centers with a heat-erasable marker. Do this with the zipper as well.vinyl zipper pouch zipper
  • Apply double-sided sewing tape to the folded fabric edge
  • Align center marks and position the fabric zipper panel about ¼” from the teeth
  • Fingerpress in place—no pins needed.
  • Pull the zipper apart and repeat on the other side.

5-Sewing the Zipper

Use a zipper foot or move your needle position to the left or right, so the needle is about ¼ from the zipper teeth and the edge of your presser foot is against the zipper teeth.vinvyl zipper pouch

Topstitch 1/8 from the fabric edge.

Repeat for the other side

Tip: Heat the marked center points with the tip of your iron to erase marks before adding the zipper pull.

Optional Front Label

If you want to add a label to the front of the bag, now is the time.

When topstitching the label, place a piece of tissue paper under the vinyl as you sew.

6-Adding the Zipper Pull

Lightly singe zipper ends with a lighter to stop fraying.

vinyl zipper pouch zipper jigTo apply the zipper pull, use a zipper jig or guide it on by hand. Make sure the fabric edges are lined up.

DIY vinyl zipper pouch

7-Sewing the Side Seams

You can have the zipper at the top or the front of the bag.

  • Decide zipper placement (top or front).
  • Place right sides together, lining up vinyl edges.
  • Trim off excess fabric and zipper.
  • Clip in place.

***If you want to add a label to the SIDE OF THE BAG, insert it into the seam line at this point and clip it in place.

GET MY EDITABLE LABELS HERE.

vinvyl zipper pouch side seams

***Placing a strip of tissue paper under the vinyl when sewing will help keep the vinyl from sticking to the sewing plate. (Rip it off when finished sewing the seams.

  • Stitch side seams using a 3/8″ seam allowance. Use a long stitch length (3 – 3.5) for strength. Backstitch at the beginning and end of the seams.
teflon foot

Using a Teflon foot on your machine will keep the vinyl from sticking.

No Teflon Foot? No Problem.

Add clear tape to the bottom of your regular presser foot (leave the needle hole uncovered). It helps the foot glide smoothly over vinyl.

vinyl zipper pouch seams

8-Reinforcing & Finishing the Seams

  • Clip corners at an angle (don’t cut the seam!)
  • Zigzag the raw edges of the fabric and the zipper area.
  • Backstitch at the beginning and end of the seams.
  • Trim threads and remove tissue paper.

9-Turning the Pouch Right Side Out

  • Warm the vinyl gently with a hair dryer if stiff.
  • Push corners out using a blunt tool.
  • Zip closed and smooth seams.
  • Use a seam roller for crisp edges
vinyl zipper pouch pattern

That’s all there is to it!

boxed corner vinyl zipper pouch

10-How to Add a Flat (Boxed) Bottom

A flat bottom lets your pouch stand up on its own and allows more space.

  • Leave the pouch wrong-side out.
  • Pull the corner out into a triangle.
  • Open the seam allowance and flatten it out.

To determine the boxed cut measurement, simply divide the desired bottom measurement by 2.

boxed corner

For a 2″ flat bottom, measure 1″ down from the corner point.vinyl zipper pouch

  • Mark the stitch line using painter’s tape.
  • Stitch along the tape edge.
  • Backstitch at the beginning and end of the seam.
  • Trim the excess seam allowance, then repeat for the other corner.vinyl zipper pouch boxed corner
  • Turn right side out and poke out the corners using a round tip turning stick or the end of a paintbrush.

Viola! That’s all there is to it!

Fill with cosmetics, sewing/craft supplies, toiletries, etc. These make great gifts!

 

Have fun sewing!

jan3

Share:

Facebook
Twitter
Pinterest

Connect:

Picture of Jan Howell

Jan Howell

Whether it’s a new recipe, a fun craft, or some handy tips for your garden and home, I hope to empower and inspire you with skills that you can use to create joy, improved health, and to do it in a simple way.

Read More

How To Sew With a Twin Needle / Setup, Tips & Creative Uses

twin needle
TWIN NEEDLE

If you’ve ever struggled to get professional-looking hems on knit fabrics, or wondered what in the world a twin needle is actually for… you’re in the right place.

In a previous tutorial, I showed you how to hem knit fabrics using a twin needle, but in this post, we’re taking a deeper dive. 

sewing with a twin needle

A twin needle isn’t just for hems. This little gadget can add texture, stability, decorative stitching, and some seriously fun details to your sewing projects — whether you’re working with knits or wovens.

twin needle

What Is a Twin Needle?

A twin needle is exactly what it sounds like — two needles attached to one shaft that fits right into a standard home sewing machine. It creates:

  • Two parallel stitches on top
  • A zigzag stitch on the underside

This is what gives twin-needle hems that stretchy, ready-to-wear look.

twin needle

Needle Packaging Numbers Explained

If needle packaging has always confused you, you’re not alone.

First number = distance between the needles (ex: 4.0mm)

Second number = needle size (ex: 75, 100)

The type = stretch, universal, denim, etc.
Examples:

  • 4.0 / 75 Stretch → perfect for knit fabrics
  • 1.0 / 70 Universal → very narrow, great for lightweight fabrics
  • 4.0 / 100 Denim → strong enough for thick seams and topstitching
twin needl supplies

What You’ll Need

  • Your sewing machine
  • Twin needle appropriate for your project (This set comes with a variety)
  • Two spools of thread (or one spool + a matching bobbin)
  • A bobbin filled with the same color threadpressor foot twin needle
  • Presser foot with a wide opening (zigzag or pintuck foot)
  • Scrap fabric for testing tensiontwin needle thread
  • A place to hold the second spool — your machine may have a hidden spot for this, and come with another bit of spindle attachment. If not, you can order one here. 

twin needle threadTIP: If your machine doesn’t include a second spool pin, you can stack a wound bobbin on top of your main thread spool and secure it with a thread cap.

How to Set Up and Thread a Twin Needle

  1. Insert the twin needle with the flat side facing back.
  2. Place your two threads on the machine.threading twin needle
  3. If your machine has two tension channels, separate them. If not, thread both together through the same path.
  4. Separate the threads before the final needle guide.twin needle
  5. Only thread the left thread through the needle guide.
  6. Thread each needle individually.

twin needle positionMake sure your stitch is set to straight stitch and center needle position.breaking a twin needle
***VERY IMPORTANT:
Do NOT choose a zigzag stitch. Do NOT move your needle position left or right. That’s the fast track to snapping needles — ask me how I know.

 

Twin Needle Stitch Settings

Length:

Lightweight wovens → 2.0–3.0
Medium fabrics → 2.5–3.0
Denim → 3.5–4.0

Tension:

Start at four and only adjust if needed.
Avoid significant tension changes — too much fiddling can throw off your machine’s internal calibration.

Pintucks, Grids & Decorative Stitching

This is where it gets fun.

  • Using a pintuck foot, you can create tiny raised ridges that add beautiful texture to blouses, bags, quilt panels, and more.
  • Stitching on lightweight fabrics creates a lovely “tunneling” effect.

twin needle gridTo Make A Gridded Texture

Draw a one-inch grid with a heat-erase marker and sew all vertical lines, then horizontal lines.

The result is a raised quilted texture that looks fantastic on:

  • Zipper pouches
  • Bag panels
  • Decorative pillows

twin needle decorative stitchesDecorative Stitches

If your machine allows it, you can use a twin needle with decorative stitches—or even two different thread colors!

twin needle decoratative stitches

Using a Twin Needle on Clothing

Twin needles shine on knit garments:

  • Hemming t-shirts and leggings
  • Stitching bindings
  • Flattening seam
  • allowances
  • Adding decorative contrast lines

That parallel topstitch gives your project that clean, store-bought finish.

Twin NeedleTroubleshooting Common Problems

❌ Skipped Stitches

  • Wrong needle type
  • Incorrect threading
  • Tension disks not engaged

 

❌ Broken Needle

  • Using zigzag stitch
  • Needle in left/right position
  • Presser foot opening too narrow

❌ Tunneling

  • Reduce tension slightly
  • Use a stabilizer or wash-away tape
  • Shorten stitch length
  • Use a pintuck foot (on purpose!)

❌ Uneven Stitches

  • Sew more steadily
  • Use a walking foot
  • Avoid frequent stopping/starting

Once you get the hang of it, the twin needle becomes one of those “why didn’t I use this sooner?” tools.

It creates beautiful hems, adds texture, and opens up tons of creative possibilities for bag-making, garment sewing, quilting, and upcycling.

I hope this tutorial gives you the confidence to pull out that twin needle you bought years ago and finally put it to work!

Have fun sewing!

jan3

Share:

Facebook
Twitter
Pinterest

Connect:

Picture of Jan Howell

Jan Howell

Whether it’s a new recipe, a fun craft, or some handy tips for your garden and home, I hope to empower and inspire you with skills that you can use to create joy, improved health, and to do it in a simple way.

Read More

How To Hem Knit Fabrics / 4 easy Ways to Get a Professional Finish

hemming knit fabric
hemming knit fabric

Have you ever tried to hem a t-shirt, leggings, or another stretchy item only to end up with a wavy, stretched-out mess? 😬 It can be so frustrating — but it doesn’t have to be!

In this tutorial, I’m going to show you four simple ways to hem knit fabric so your projects look clean, professional, and wave-free.

These methods are easy to do, and once you try them, you’ll never dread hemming stretch fabric again.

Use the Right Needle

Before anything else, make sure you’re using the correct needle for knit fabrics.

A ballpoint needle of some kind, a stretch needle, jersey or microtex needle gently separates the fabric fibers instead of piercing them, preventing those annoying little holes along your stitches.

tip

Keep your needles organized!

I like to store my “in-use” needle in a labeled pin cushion so I always know what’s in my machine.

needle pin cushion

LEARN HOW TO MAKE A SEWING MACHINE NEEDLE PINCUSHION HERE: 

1. Stabilize with Stitch Witchery Fusible Web

If your fabric edges love to curl, fusible bonding web will be your best friend.hemming knit fabric stitch witchery

  • Stitch Witchery comes in two different widths (¼” or ⅝” wide), place it along the hem edge, fold the fabric over, and press with your iron. This gives your hem stability and keeps it flat while you sew.
  • Then, use a zigzag stitch or lightning bolt stitch so your seam can stretch with the fabric.

hem knit fabrics❌ Avoid straight stitches when sewing on any stretchy fabrics — they’ll pop when the fabric stretches!

2. Wash-Away Wonder Tape

This is one of my go-to hemming hacks!

Wash-Away Wonder Tape is a double-sided adhesive tape that holds your hem in place perfectly without pins.

  • Apply it to the wrong side of your fabric, peel off the paper backing, fold the hem, and sew.

The best part? It won’t gum up your sewing machine needle.

💧 Important: After sewing, wash your project before wearing or using, to dissolve the tape before stretching the fabric — otherwise, your stitches may pop.

spry starch hemming knit fabrics

3. Spray Starch for Extra Control

Sometimes all you need is a little extra control!

A light mist of spray starch makes your knit fabric more stable and easier to fold.

  • Lay down some paper to protect your ironing surface, spray your hem area well, and press it in place.

This will not hold it in place or make it stiff forever, but it will give you just enough structure to get a clean, even fold before sewing.

hemming knit fabrics top stitching twin needle

4. Get a Professional Look with a Twin Needle

hemming knit fabrics top stitching twin needle

If you want that store-bought finish on your t-shirts and leggings, a twin needle is the secret weapon.

It creates two parallel lines of stitching on the right side and a zigzag on the back, allowing for stretch while looking polished.

Threading two needles on a regular sewing machine is easier than it looks. 

  1. Insert the twin needle into your machine.
  2. Set the machine to a normal STRAIGHT STITCH (2.5)
  3. Thread your machine just like you always do.
  4. Add another spool of thread using the extra spindle tha most sewing machines will have. You can use another spool or thread or a bobbin.threading a twin neeedle
  5. Thread it through the machine the same way. EXCEPT, DO NOT THREAD IT THROUGHT THE THREAD GUIDE as shown in the picture above.
  6. Thread both needles and you are ready to roll.
    *** Make sure you are using a presser foot that allows the zig zag stitch.
hemming knit fabrics twin needle

Sew on the right side of the fabric, and hold your threads for a few stitches to avoid thread nests.

And there you have it — four easy, reliable ways to hem stretchy knit fabric like a pro.

Whether you use

these methods will give you smooth, flat hems every time.

Which technique do you like best?

Let me know in the comments below!

Stay tuned — I’ve got more knit fabric projects and patterns coming up that will show you just how fun and easy sewing with knits can be.

Share:

Facebook
Twitter
Pinterest

Connect:

Picture of Jan Howell

Jan Howell

Whether it’s a new recipe, a fun craft, or some handy tips for your garden and home, I hope to empower and inspire you with skills that you can use to create joy, improved health, and to do it in a simple way.

Read More

How to Adjust the Size of a Boxed Zipper Pouch / Super Easy Formula

boxed zipper pouch measurement formula

Zipper pouches are one of those projects you can never have too many of—practical, cute, and surprisingly simple to sew.

But what if the pattern you’re using isn’t the size you want? Do you cross your fingers and hope for the best?

Nope—there’s an easy formula you can use to make your pouch exactly the size you need.

In this post, I’ll walk you through the simple math behind resizing a boxed zipper pouch.

Once you understand this, you can create pouches in any dimension—perfect for makeup bags, snack bags, or even overnight totes.

Why Adjust the Size of a Zipper Pouch?

  • Maybe you saw a pouch at the store and wished it were just a bit taller.
  • Or perhaps you need something smaller to fit earbuds, lip balm, or a little collection of sewing notions.

Instead of hunting down the “perfect” pattern, you can adjust what you already have.

By using this formula, you’ll be able to:

  • Scale a zipper pouch up or down.
  • Customize the depth and width for your needs.
  • Always know how big to cut your panels and the dimensions of your box corners.

Step 1: Decide on Your Finished Size

The first step is determining how large you want your bag to be.

zipper pouch Tip: Use an existing pouch or gather the items you plan to store in the bag.

Set them side by side to get a sense of the dimensions you’ll need.

For example, I wanted a little overnight pouch to hold facial products. After measuring, I decided:

Length:: 5 ½ inches
Height: 5 inches
Width: 2 inches

CLICK ON THE LINK BELOW TO GET THE FREE PDF.

Step 2: Use the Formula

I recommend downloading and printing this form so you can have it in front of you for visual reference.

Otherwise, I find it’s too easy to forget or get the measurements all mixed up, which can result in the wrong size panel being cut out. (Believe me, I have done it more than once!)

Every pouch starts as a flat rectangle of fabric.

To figure out the size of that rectangle (the panel), use this formula:

Horizontal Cut = Desired Length + Desired HEIGHT+ Seam Allowances x 2 (X 4 IF USING FRENCH SEAMS)
Vertical Cut = Desired WIDTH + Desired HEIGHT+ Seam Allowance x 2

For my example:

HORIZONTAL CUT = DESIRED LENGTH 8″ + DESIRED HEIGHT 8″ + 1 1/4″ (for French seam allowance) = 9 1/4 inches

VERTICAL CUT = DESIRED WIDTH 4″ + DESIRED HEIGHT 8″ = 12″ + (seam allowance) 3/4 inces = 12 3/4″
So, each panel would be 12 3/4 9 1/4  X 13.

boxed cornerYou’ll cut:

2 panels of outer fabric
2 panels of lining
Stabilizer (optional, same size as panels)

zipper length

Step 3: Figure Out the Zipper Length

Your zipper length = DESIRED WIDTH plus 1.  I like to cut it at least 1/2 inch longer, just to be safe. 

If you’re using zipper by the yard (which I love). Cut it to the desired length.
If you’re using a store-bought zipper, choose the closest size and trim if needed.

boxed zipper pouch

Step 4: The Secret to Box Corners

BOX CUTBox Cut = 1/2 of the desired finished height minus 3/4 inch seam allowance. 

boxed corner zipper pouch cutting marks📌 Tip: Always account for the seam allowance when marking your box corners!

Measure from the seam and the fold, NOT THE FABRIC EDGE. 

Step 5: Mark and Cut Correctly

There are two primary methods for marking box corners:

  1. Before sewing the side seams, lay your panel flat and cut the square directly from the corners, ensuring you add the seam allowance.
  2. After sewing the side seams, mark the box cut and then cut. (Measure from the seam).

Either way works—it just depends on your pattern and personal preference.

tip

square ruler painters tapeThis is an excellent tip: when you’re making that box corner, this little square ruler comes in real handy.

You can use a regular ruler, your own, or another type of template that you prefer.

By placing a piece of painter’s tape on the measurement of the cut, it will make it much easier on the eyes, and it will save you time from fidgeting around to find the lines again.  

Step 6: Keep Notes

I highly recommend jotting down your measurements on a printable chart (I created one for you—download it free below!).

This way, you won’t forget your panel and zipper dimensions the next time you want to make the same size pouch.

Write down:

  • Finished bag size
  • Panel dimensions
  • Number of pieces to cut (outer, lining, stabilizer)
  • Zipper length

Final Thoughts

That’s it! With just a little math, you can make zipper pouches in any size you want.

Whether you prefer a tiny pouch for earbuds or a roomy overnight bag, this formula will take the guesswork out of resizing.

✨ Try making a few different sizes—you’ll be surprised how versatile these pouches can be.

My snack bags, for example, use a larger box corner so they stand upright, while some of my cosmetic bags use a much smaller corner for a sleeker look.

Happy sewing—and have fun making your perfect pouch!

Share:

Facebook
Twitter
Pinterest

Connect:

Step 3: Figure Out the Zipper Length

Your zipper length = DESIRED  WIDTH  5 1/2 + DESIRED HEIGHT 5 + 2 INCHES. I like to cut it at least 1/2 inch longer, just to be safe. 

For this example:
5 ½” (width) + 5″ (height) + 2″ = 12 ½ to 13 inches.

If you’re using zipper by the yard (which I love). Cut it to the desired length.
If you’re using a store-bought zipper, choose the closest size and trim if needed.

Picture of Jan Howell

Jan Howell

Whether it’s a new recipe, a fun craft, or some handy tips for your garden and home, I hope to empower and inspire you with skills that you can use to create joy, improved health, and to do it in a simple way.

Read More

Related Posts

How to Sew a Zipper Pocket the Easy Way

zipper pocket the easy way

Have you ever looked at a bag pattern and thought, “A zipper pocket? That looks way too complicated!”

I used to think the same thing.
But trust me—it’s much easier than it looks.

Once you try it, you’ll love adding zipper pockets to your handmade bags and clothing.

In this step-by-step tutorial, I’ll show you how to sew a zipper pocket using a cross-body bag lining.

Add this pocket to the inside or outside of a bag—or even a jacket or skirt!

zipper pocket items

Materials You’ll Need

  • Pocket fabric with fusible fleece applied
  • Bag lining piece with fusible fleece
  • Zipper (cut to 8” from zipper-by-the-yard or use a pre-packaged 7” zipper)
  • Zipper pull (if using zipper by the yard)
  • Fabric glue (or glue stick)
  • Basic sewing tools (scissors, pins, sewing machine, ruler)
  • Rotary Cutter/Mat/Ruler (optional)
  • Optional: Zipper template for marking
  • Iron and pressing surface

Step 1: Mark the Zipper Boxzipper pocket center point

  1. Fold your pocket piece and lining piece in half to find the center.
  2. Mark the center fold with a fabric pen or pencil.zipper pocket box markings
  3. Measure down 1½” from the top edge of your pocket fabric and draw a horizontal line.
  4. Then, measure down another ½” and draw a second line.
  5. Draw a 7″ rectangle between the lines, centering it horizontally (3½” from the center mark on each side).
  6. Measure down 1/4 inch from the top of the rectangle and draw another horizontal line.
  7. Mark triangle marks at the ends for clipping.
    Tip: You can use a zipper pocket template if you have one, or make your own.

I’ll show you how to do that in an upcoming tutorial!

Step 2: Sew the Zipper Pocket Box

  1. Place the pocket piece right sides together with the lining piece, aligning the center marks.
  2. Measure 2″ down from the top of the lining and pin the pocket in place.sewing zipper pocket box
  3. Sew around the rectangle, pivoting at each corner. Backstitch at the beginning and end of stitching.

Step 3: Cut the Zipper Opening

  1. Fold the pocket in half vertically along the center slit line and make a small clip with scissors to start the cut.
  2. Cut along the center line and out toward the triangle corners without cutting the stitching.
  3. Flip the pocket fabric through the opening to the back side and press it flat.

Step 4: Insert the Zipper

  1. If you’re using zipper-by-the-yard, attach the zipper pull now. (For a more detailed demo, check my other tutorials.)zipper pocket glue
  2. Apply a thin bead of fabric glue or use a glue stick around the inside edge of the box.zipper pocket zipper application
  3. Place the zipper on the right side up, centered on the opening.zipper pocket pressing
  4. Flip the fabric over, adjust the zipper from the back, and press with an iron to secure.

zipper pocket topstitchingStep 5: Topstitch Around the Zipper Box

  1. Switch to a zipper foot and adjust your needle to the left or right if needed.  You want to sew about 1/8 inch from the fabric edge of the box.
  2. Use a slightly longer stitch length (3.0mm) and topstitch around the zipper.tip
  3. Hold the thread tails for the first few stitches to prevent bunching.
    Move the zipper pull out of the way as you sew.

Step 6: Finishing the Zipper Pocketzipper pocket seams

  1. Fold the bottom of the pocket piece in half, right sides together, lining up the top edge.
  2. Clip or pin the sides and top edge.
  3. Sew around the three edges with a ⅜” seam allowance using your regular presser foot and a 2.5mm stitch length. Do not sew the bottom fold.

That’s It!

You’ve just added a zipper pocket to your project—wasn’t that easier than you thought?

It’s neat, functional, and professional-looking.

This pocket is now ready to be inserted into my crossbody bag project.

Be sure to check out the crossbody bag tutorial and pattern!

Want to Learn More?

Be sure to subscribe to my YouTube channel so you don’t miss future tutorials.
Visit youmakeitsimple.com store for patterns and printables.

crossbody bag tutorial
Happy sewing!

Share:

Facebook
Twitter
Pinterest

Connect:

Picture of Jan Howell

Jan Howell

Whether it’s a new recipe, a fun craft, or some handy tips for your garden and home, I hope to empower and inspire you with skills that you can use to create joy, improved health, and to do it in a simple way.

Read More

Related Posts

Calculating Quilt Binding Yardage Made Easy: Step-by-Step Formula

quilt binding
QUILT BINDING

Getting ready to bind your quilt, but not sure how much fabric you’ll need?
Don’t worry — figuring out quilt binding yardage is easier than you might think!

With just a little simple math, you’ll be able to calculate precisely what you need without any guesswork.

quilt binding calculator

In this tutorial, I’ll walk you through the easy step-by-step method I use, and I’ve even put together a free printable binding formula sheet you can download to make the process even smoother.

Having everything written down on paper helps keep your project organized and accurate!

How to Measure Quilt Binding Yardage Instructions

Step 1: Measure Your Quilt

  • Measure the width of your quilt and write that number down.
  • Multiply the width by 2.
    Example:
    Width = 44 inches
    44 × 2 = 88 inches
  • Measure the height of your quilt and write that number down.
  • Multiply the height by 2.

Example:
Height = 39 inches
39 × 2 = 78 inches

Step 2: Calculate the Circumference

  • Add the two numbers together:
    88 + 78 = 166 inches
  • Add an extra 12 inches to account for binding seams and finishing:
    166 + 12 = 178 inches

This final number is the total circumference of your quilt that will need to be bound.

quilt binding strips

Step 3: Determine How Many Strips to Cut

  • Measure the width of your fabric.
    (Most quilting cotton is between 42 to 45 inches wide. Always double-check your fabric!)

Example:
Fabric width = 45 inches

  • Divide the circumference by the fabric width:
    178 ÷ 45 = 3.95

Since you can’t cut a partial strip, round up to the next whole number.
In this case, you would round up to 4 strips.
(Or even 5 strips if you want a little extra, just to be safe!)

quilt binding

Step 4: Figure Fabric Yardage Needed

If you want to know how much fabric you’ll need:

  • Multiply the number of strips by the strip width, which is usually 2.5 inches.

Example:
4 strips × 2.5 inches = 10 inches of fabric needed

Since 36 inches = 1 yard, you can see that 10 inches is much less than a yard.
Often, you can get your quilt binding from a single fat quarter or a fabric scrap you already have!

When cutting the strips, I recommend using a rotary cutter, a cutting mat, and a ruler.

This makes the job easier and you’ll get much straighter cuts than you would if you used a pair of scissors.

tip

If you want to save time, frustration, and get even cuts every time, this cutting ruler from Creative Grids Stripology works like a charm. 

If you plan to make a lot of binding or bias tape, I recommend it. (I finally bought one for myself, and I wish I’d gotten one sooner.) 

Bonus Tip: Bias Binding vs Straight Grain Binding

If you’re binding a quilt with straight edges, you can cut your strips with the grain of the fabric.
It’s faster and wastes less fabric.

If you want your binding to be cut on the diagonal (also called bias binding), that’s a little different.

Bias binding is ideal if your quilt has curved edges or if you want a diagonal stripe effect along the edge of your quilt.

👉 I have a full, separate tutorial that shows you how to cut bias strips easily! 

quilt binding

Quilt Binding Final Thoughts

Figuring out quilt binding yardage doesn’t have to be complicated.

Once you go through these simple steps a few times — and especially if you use the free printable formula sheet — it will start to feel like second nature.

A little bit of math now saves a lot of frustration later!

Watch the full video tutorial for all the best binding tips and tricks.

This video tutorial shows a very simple hack for matching the stripes when binding stsrips.

If you’re just getting started with quilting, be sure to check out the other tutorials in my Beginner Quilter Series.

I cover everything from setting up a quilt on a frame to sewing your quilt binding with simple, beginner-friendly methods.

YOUTUBE BEGINNER QUILTING SERIES

Happy quilting!

 

Share:

Facebook
Twitter
Pinterest

Connect:

Picture of Jan Howell

Jan Howell

Whether it’s a new recipe, a fun craft, or some handy tips for your garden and home, I hope to empower and inspire you with skills that you can use to create joy, improved health, and to do it in a simple way.

Read More

Related Posts

How To Square the Edges and Corners of a Quilt / Beginner Quilting

Square the Edges and Corners of a Quilt

In this post, I show you how to square the edges and corners of a Quilt to prepare it for binding.

In a previous tutorial, I showed you how to place your fabric and batting onto a quilting frame.  If you haven’t read that, you can find it HERE.

This trimming process works for small and large quilts and is a key skill for a beginner quilter to learn. 

Square the Edges and Corners of a Quilt

When I made this quilt, I used big stitches and followed the stripes in the fabric.

I added small crochet thread ties on the back of the quilt to help stabilize the layers.

That extra stitching was necessary because although the stitches were close enough in one direction, they were spaced too far apart in the other

If I’d used polyester batting, it might not have been a big deal—but with cotton batting, closer stitching is essential for durability and structure.

  • For cotton batting quilts, quilting lines should generally be spaced no more than 3-4 inches apart, or even closer for quilts that are washed frequently or if you prefer a more stable, less bulky feel. 
  • For polyester batting, quilting lines can generally be spaced further apart than with 100% cotton batting. Some brands recommend up to 10 inches between quilting lines, but always check the specific batting’s instructions. 

Always check the manufacturer’s recommendations on the batting package for specific guidelines. 

Tools You’ll Need To Square the Edges and Corners of a Quilt

Step-by-Step: How to Square the Edges and Corners of a Quilt

1. Start with the Corners

It’s easiest to begin by trimming and squaring up your corners first.

Square the Edges and Corners of a QuiltWhen we placed the quilt on the frame earlier, we made the backing fabric slightly larger than the top. So now we need to trim off that excess.

Square the Edges and Corners of a Quilt

Keep the lines parallel to your cuts if the quilt top has stripes or a printed pattern.

Pieced quilt tops may have uneven edges due to sewing all the panels together. 

That’s fine—we’re going for a straight and clean edge, even if we trim a little off.

2. Use the Right Ruler for the Job

You can use:

I like to start with the square ruler at the corners and then use the long ruler to connect the cuts.

3. Prep Your Rotary Cutter

Make sure your rotary cutter has a sharp, clean blade.

If it’s been a while, change it out! A dull blade can make it take longer because of having to make multiple passes to get a clean cut.

I have a separate video on how to safely change the blade and use your rotary cutter—check that out if you’re new to it.

tip

Janni Tip:

Use a hand weight to help keep your ruler from shifting while you cut.

Square the Edges and Corners of a QuiltI like using a simple 5 lb hand weight placed on the ruler. This adds stability, especially when using the longer ruler.

Square the Edges and Corners of a Quilt

4. Make Your First Cut

Line up your ruler with the edge of the quilt, just past any frayed fabric. Then, press down firmly (or use your hand weight), and make a clean cut along the edge using your rotary cutter.

If your quilt is large and the ruler is not long enough to get to the other end, just cut the length of the ruler and move on to the next corner.

Square the Edges and Corners of a Quilt

5. Connect the Corners

Once you’ve trimmed the corners, use your long ruler to connect them with a straight edge.

Double-check that everything lines up nicely.

For safety, it’s best to cut away from your body, and if needed, stand up to gain better control and leverage as you make that long cut.

Square the Edges and Corners of a Quilt

That’s all there is to square the edges and corners of a quilt.

Now that your edges and corners are trimmed and squared up, your quilt is ready for one of my favorite steps: adding the binding.

Stay tuned for the next video and blog post in the series, where I’ll show you how to measure, cut, and apply binding to finish your quilt beautifully.

Happy quilting!

Share:

Facebook
Twitter
Pinterest

Connect:

Picture of Jan Howell

Jan Howell

Whether it’s a new recipe, a fun craft, or some handy tips for your garden and home, I hope to empower and inspire you with skills that you can use to create joy, improved health, and to do it in a simple way.

Read More

Related Posts

DIY Beginner Quilting / How to Set Up a Quilt on a Quilting Frame the Easy Way

diy quilting frame setup
quilting frame series part 2

In this post, which is part two of my DIY quilting series, I show you how to set up a quilt on a quilting frame using a traditional method that many crafters have never seen before.

QUILTING FRAME FABRICMaking a quilt is a rewarding experience. There’s just something special about piecing colorful fabrics together, tying or quilting them, and connecting with others.

quilting frames with friendsIf you missed part one, where I demonstrated how to make your quilting frames out of wood, be sure to check that out first.

Now, let’s attach the fabric and batting to the frame so you can start your quilt!

Materials You’ll Need

Before we begin, gather the following materials:

  • Quilting frames – If you haven’t made yours yet, watch part one of this series.
  • Fabric – I made a baby quilt for this tutorial and cut the fabric pieces (36” x 43”). I chose a striped cotton fabric for the top and a neutral-colored flannel for the backing.QUILTING FRAME BATTING
  • Batting – I use a natural cotton batting, but polyester batting is also an option. Polyester batting tends to have more loft and makes for a cozy quilt, while cotton works well for hand-stitched quilts.
  • C-clamps—These hold the boards of the quilting frame together. I use 2.5” clamps, but 2” to 4” clamps will also work.quilting frame wrist pincushion
  • Pins – Lots of them! I use a wrist pin cushion for easy access while working. Stay tuned for the pattern and the tutorial on how to make one of these. 
  • Quilting frame stands (optional) – If you don’t have stands, you can use four chairs, your couch, or even set up the frame on a clean floor.

To make it easier for you, I’ve created a downloadable PDF with quilting size guidelines from baby to king size.

Click on the link below to download and print a copy of the quilting size chart.

Step 1: Preparing Your Fabric

Cut your quilt top to 40” x 44.5” or whatever size you want.

Cut the backing and batting slightly larger than the quilt top to allow for any shrinkage during quilting.

QUILTING FRAME BATTING
For the batting, I’m using pre-cut cotton batting that comes in a 45” x 60” package, which works well for crib-sized quilts, however, I’m going to cut it down for this small quilt.

If using cotton batting, remember that your stitches should be closer together than polyester batting.

QUILTING FRAME HALFWAY POINTMark the halfway points on your quilt top and backing fabric by folding each side in half and mark the center point using a pin or erasable fabric marker. 

You’ll also need to mark the halfway points on your frame boards. 

This will help align everything evenly during setup.

Step 2: Attaching the Fabric to the Frame

1-Set up your quilting frame. If using stands, get them ready. Otherwise, position the frame using the back of chairs or set it up on the floor and put it on the stand.

2- To start, the boards should be close together. Then, establish which boards will be the sideboards and the top/bottom boards.

Pin from the center outward, leaving about 6 inches unpinned on each end.

3- Position the backing fabric. Drape the backing fabric over the side boards with the right side of the fabric facing down.

4- Pin the backing fabric. You will pin one side at a time. Match the center mark on the fabric with the center mark on the board.quilting frame

5- Attach the top and bottom boards. These boards will rest on top of the sideboards. Let the fabric drape down until all sides are pinned to the boards. Pin the fabric in the same way.

quilting framesNow, you can start to move the stands and boards further apart.

Do not pull the fabric too tight—smooth it out so it is flat.

QUILTING FRAME6- Secure the frame with C-clamps. Adjust the crossing points of the boards so the fabric lays even and is squared, then tighten the C-clamps at each corner. (You should not see any pulling or stretching of the fabric).

7- Add the batting – Gently lay the batting on top, centering it. (Do not pull or tug the batting).

(Remember that the backing fabric was cut a little larger, so allow the fabric to come in on the frame about 1 ½ inches from the board’s inner edge).

Once that side is complete, go to the other side’s board and do the same thing.

Pin it in place just like the backing fabric. (You don’t need to put as many pins in the batting).

QUILT FRAME

8- Attach the quilt top – Lay the quilt top right side up, aligning it with the center marks on the board.

Pin the center points first. Then pin in the same manner, from the center out. (The quilt top will be smaller.)

If you need to add or remove pins to get all layers pinned to the fabric strip on boards, do so.

QUILT FRAME C CLAMPS9- Adjust C Clamps. At this stage, go around to all the C clamps and loosen and tighten them to adjust the fabric so it is squared up and the quilt top is smooth but NOT PULLED TIGHT!

quilt frame

Step 3: Choosing a Quilting Method

You’re ready to get to work once your quilt is secured on the frame. Yay!

There are several ways to finish your quilt:Upcycled Denim Jeans

  • Tying—This is a simple method in which you tie knots at intervals across the quilt. (It is a great option when using polyester batting and when you want to finish a quilt quickly.)
    A tied quilt with polyester batting is quite cozy; that is what my kids prefer.

You can view a tutorial showing how to tie a quilt HERE. 

big stitches quilt frame

  • Big stitches—For this baby quilt, I used lightweight crochet thread to make large stitches along the stripes in my fabric. I decided to add a small tie as well. (photo above).

quilt frame stitches kolby

  • Hand quilting—If you want a more intricate design, you can quilt around specific patterns on your fabric using quilting thread. I recommend using cotton batting for this method.

This method can take a lot more time, but it will give you that old-time crinkly look that we all love in a vintage quilt.

I’ll demonstrate different quilting stitches in a future post, so stay tuned for that!

rolling quilt frame

Step 4: Rolling the Quilt for Stitching

The boards on the top and bottom of the quilt were set up so you could roll the quilt as you go to have better access for quilting.

Once you can’t reach to stitch, it’s time to “roll the boards.”

1- Loosen the C-clamps at the corners of the boards you want to roll.
2- Remove pins about 12 inches from the edge

3- Roll the boards a few times until you have a close working space, but not so close that you can’t stitch.

4- Re-clamp the frame to hold the quilt in place.
You might need someone to help roll the fabric evenly on both sides for larger quilts.

storing quilt frame

Step 5: Storing and Moving Your Quilting Frame During the Quilting Process

One of the great things about using a quilting frame is that it’s portable.

If you need to move your quilt while working on it, lift the entire frame carefully (you may need help for larger quilts).

Turn it on its side and lean it against a wall out of the way. You could even move it to another room if you wanted.

If homemade stands are used, they can be easily disassembled for storage.

Bringing Back the Tradition of Quilting Bees

I want to start a monthly quilting bee with family and friends to make the quilting process even more enjoyable.

We’ll gather, chat, and quilt together like in the old days.

This will be a great way to use some of my flannel fabric stash for donation quilts and gifts!

Final Thoughts

I hope this post inspires you to try quilting the old-school way!

Remember to download the free quilting size chart from my website, YouMakeItSimple.com, and check out my other patterns and DIY tutorials.

Let me know in the comments if you’d like a tutorial on making a wrist pin cushion—it’s such a handy tool!

Stay tuned for the next video, in which my husband will show you how to make your own quilting stands.

Happy quilting!

Share:

Facebook
Twitter
Pinterest

Connect:

Picture of Jan Howell

Jan Howell

Whether it’s a new recipe, a fun craft, or some handy tips for your garden and home, I hope to empower and inspire you with skills that you can use to create joy, improved health, and to do it in a simple way.

Read More

Related Posts

How to Make DIY Quilting Frames: A Simple Guide to Hand Quilting

diy quilting frames
quilting frames generations

Quilting frames have been used for centuries before high-tech machines and elaborate setups.

hand quilting with friendsHand quilting was a tradition that brought people together, sharing stories, laughter, and creativity while making something beautiful and practical.

This social gathering was referred to as a “quilting bee”. 

What is the definition of a Quilting Bee?

A quilting bee is a social gathering where people come together to make quilts. The term originated in the United States between 1825 and 1835.

What is the purpose?

  • Community building: Quilting bees provide a place for people to come together and support each other. 
  • Socializing: Quilting bees are a chance for people to gossip, get advice, and console each other. 
  • Completing quilts: Quilting bees allow people to work together to finish a quilt in one day. 

I wish that this was more common nowadays. 

The quilts I have made and the experiences I’ve had with the family gathered around a quilt have driven me to start making more quilts and inviting friends and family over for all of these purposes.

The first step for you to get started would be to make yourself a set of quilting frames.

long arm quilting frames

Quilting today can sometimes feel like an expensive hobby, with fancy machines and costly fabric.

The truth is, you don’t need a long-arm machine or an elaborate setup to enjoy this timeless craft! In this tutorial, I’ll show you how to make your own quilting frames—an easy and affordable way to bring back the joy of hand quilting.

paying under quilting frames
This is my son Sam who is now 30

Why Use Quilting Frames?

I fondly remember playing under a quilt as a child while it was stitched. It felt like a colorful tent, full of warmth and creativity.

Quilting frames are a great way to enjoy this traditional craft, and they’re simple to set up and store.

With these frames, you can:

  • Tie or hand-stitch a quilt with ease.
  • Store small quilts out of the way by leaning them against a wall.
  • Avoid the hassle of having your quilting project take over the entire living room!
  • Avoid thumbtacks

quilting frames with friendsI am so surprised that so many crafters today have never seen this technique before, and I want to bring it back.

Once you try quilting with these frames, you’ll be hooked!

quilting frames boards

Materials and Items 

Wood boards (labeled as 3×1 at the hardware store, but are actually 2.5 inches by ¾ inches)

  • 8-foot boards work well for lap quilts.
  • Consider 5, 6, or 7-foot boards for smaller projects.
  • Choose straight, knot-free boards.

Fabric strips for attaching the quilt

  • A high-thread-count upcycled sheet works best.
  • Cut into 6-inch strips.
    (Measure the length of the board you are using and subtract 5 inches; this will be the length of the strips).
    You will need four strips of fabric. (DO NOT PIECE STRIPS TOGETHER TO FORM A LONG STRIP.) I recommend using an upcycled sheet with a high thread count. 

 A queen or king sheet works well.

 Instructions

1. Preparing the Fabric Strips

  • Cut four fabric strips to match the length of your boards minus 5 inches.
    Fold each strip in half and press well.
  • Fold it again to measure about 2 inches wide, with raw edges folded in.
  • Staple or tack the strips along the edge of each board, leaving a small gap along the folded edge.
quilting frame boards

2. Selecting and Preparing the Boards

You may have to look through several boards to find some good ones.

  • Choose straight boards without large knots.
  • Sand all edges smoothly to prevent splinters.
    Use a 80-110 grit sandpaper on the first pass and 220 grit paper for the final pass.
  • Wipe the boards with a damp cloth to remove dust.
quilting frames

3. Attaching the Fabric Strips to the Boards

You can staple or nail the strips to the boards. 

  • Place the folded fabric strip along the board’s edge, with the cut edge of fabric on the underneath side.
  • Secure it every 3 inches with tacks or staples.
    Leave about 2-5 inches of space at the board ends.
  • If needed, use a hammer to ensure a flush edge of the staples.

4. Gathering  Supplies for the Next Step

  • C-clamps (2.5-inch recommended, but 2, 4, or 6-inch will also work).
  • Long quilting pins (about 1¾ inches long), or I like to use curved safety pins

When you have your quilting frames ready, you’ll need to learn how to attach your quilt to them.

In the following tutorial, I’ll show you exactly how to set up your quilt on the frame. 

In the 3rd tutorial in the series, my husband will show you how to make your own quilting stands. 

I hope this tutorial inspires you to try hand quilting using a simple, affordable setup.

If you enjoyed this guide, share it with your friends and family.

Stay tuned for the next post in this DIY quilting series!
Happy quilting!

Share:

Facebook
Twitter
Pinterest

Connect:

Picture of Jan Howell

Jan Howell

Whether it’s a new recipe, a fun craft, or some handy tips for your garden and home, I hope to empower and inspire you with skills that you can use to create joy, improved health, and to do it in a simple way.

Read More

How To Make a Baby Bow Headband With Knit Fabric / Free Pattern

diy baby bow headband

This post shows you how to make a cute baby bow headband using knit fabric or even an upcycled T-shirt.

If you are looking for a simple, fun project perfect for babies and toddlers, this would be one of them.

These bow headbands are stretchy, comfortable, and incredibly easy to create.

It’s an excellent project for beginner sewers.

Measurements are given for a newborn up to an adult. (Make a mom and baby set).

Whether you want a rounded-edge bow or a square bow, this tutorial covers you. Let’s dive in!

Baby Bow Headband Materials and Items Needed

  • Fabric: Any stretch knit fabric works. Upcycled T-shirts or knit dresses are great options!
  • Pattern: I’ve created a FREE copy of the pattern with written instructions, tips, and templates for the rounded-edge bow.get pattern here
  • Fabric scissors or a rotary cutter
  • Turning stick
  • Fabric clips or pins
  • Jersey or stretch needle
  • Seam gauge
  • Sewing machine or serger

Bow Headband Instructions

Step 1: Determine the Size

The best way to get the correct size is to measure the head for which you are making the headband.

If that’s impossible, refer to the Average Head Circumference Chart above.

Knit fabric will stretch to fit a wide variety of head sizes in that range, so don’t be too stressed about it.

Step 2: Cutting Out

The bow on this headband can have square or rounded ends.

For the rounded ends, use the bow template as a cutting guide.

***Feel free to alter the thickness of the headband. You may want a thicker, bulkier, or even a thinner headband.

It’s all your preference, and you can cut them out accordingly.

baby bow headband cutting out

***Make sure you cut out the strips with the stretchiness of the fabric for the widest part.

baby bow headband
  • Cut out ONE HEADBAND:   6 inches (15 cm) x HEAD MEASUREMENT – 2 inches (5cm)

Average headband width: 5-8 inches (e.g., 5 inches for a toddler).

***The finished width will be half your chosen width (e.g., 2.5 inches for a 5-inch cut).

rounded bow headband
  • Cut out ONE BOW 6 inches (15.5 cm) x 10 inches (26 cm).
  • ( I recommend 5 ½ inches for small heads)
bow headband

Step 3: Sewing the Bow Headband

Fold the HEADBAND FABRIC strip in half lengthwise.

Sew along the unfinished edge. Backstitch at the beginning and end of the seam.

Turn right side facing out using a turning stick or the eraser end of a pencil.

Align the seam so it is in the center of the headband.

Place the short ends Right Sides Together and with the seams lined up.

Using a regular straight stitch, sew along the unfinished edge using a 3/8 inch seam allowance. Trim seam allowance.

After you have sewn the headband, set it aside while you sew the bow piece.

baby bow headband

Step 4: Sewing the Bow

Square Ends: Fold the bow piece in half, Right Sides Together.

Using the straight stitch, sew the short and long sides together, leaving an inch gap unsewn—clip corners.

Turn the right side out and poke out the corners.

Rounded Ends: Sew all the way around, leaving a 1.5-inch gap on the unfolded side.
Turn right side out, pushing out the curves.

bow headband

Step 5: Bow Application

With the RIGHT SIDE OF THE HEADBAND FACING OUT and the seam on top, slide the bow piece between the layers of the headband.

Center horizontally and pin in place.

Sew down the center of the bow piece (which is under the headband) and follow the headband seam.

Backstitch at the beginning and end of the seam.

Cross the bow ends, tuck one underneath, and pull the make a knot. Adjust to your liking.

baby bow headband

jan3

Share:

Facebook
Twitter
Pinterest

Connect:

Picture of Jan Howell

Jan Howell

Whether it’s a new recipe, a fun craft, or some handy tips for your garden and home, I hope to empower and inspire you with skills that you can use to create joy, improved health, and to do it in a simple way.

Read More

The Best Way To Thread Sewing Needles | 7 Simple Tips

thread sewing needles

Threading sewing needles—whether for hand sewing or a machine—can be frustrating, but it doesn’t have to be!


You’re not alone if you’ve ever struggled to pass the thread through that tiny hole.

In this post I share seven practical tips that will help you thread sewing needles with ease, saving you time and making your projects more enjoyable.

threading sewing needles

1. Start with a Fresh Cut

One of the easiest ways to make threading a needle easier is to start with a clean cut on your thread.

Over time, thread tends to fray and become fuzzy at the ends, making it more difficult to pass through the needle’s eye.

Simply snip the end of the thread before threading, and it will go through the needle much more easily.

threading sewing needles

2. Needle Threaders

Needle threaders are a classic tool, and they make threading much easier. You’ve probably seen these little gadgets with a thin wire loop.

threading sewing needlesWire Threaders: Simply pass the wire through the eye of the needle, thread your thread through the wire loop, and pull it back through the needle.

threading sewing needlesHook Needle Threaders: You can also find hook-style threaders, which work similarly but have a little hook that grabs the thread and pulls it through.

threading sewing needles

3. Fold the Thread Over the Needle

Another simple trick for hand-sewing is to fold the thread over the needle, creating a loop.

Hold the folded thread tightly and guide the tight loop through the eye of the needle.

This method helps keep the thread together, making it easier to thread the needle in one go.

4. Use a Drop of Water

This tip might sound strange, but it works!

Instead of licking the thread (as many of us are used to doing), try dipping the eye of the needle into a drop of water.

The water helps draw the thread into the needle, making it easier to pass through the eye.

5. Quick-Threading Needles

For both hand and machine sewing, quick-threading needles can be a game-changer.

These needles have a small notch that allows you to slide the thread in without needing to pass it directly through the eye.

theading sewing needlesThey are available for hand sewing and your sewing machine.

7. Sewing Machine Automatic Threaders

Most sewing machines nowadays come with either a manual or automatic threader.

A tip for having these threaders work properly is to make sure your needle is in the most upright position before starting.

This will allow the threader to work properly.

You can adjust the needle’s position by turning the hand wheel on your sewing machine towards you until the needle reaches the highest point.

If your needle isn’t fully in the upright position, the threader hook will not be able to go through the needle hole properly.

I love my sewing machine’s automatic threaders.

Bonus Tips For Threading Sewing Needles

Beware of Gadget Failures:

Not all gadgets deliver as promised.

threading sewing needlesA thread-pushing gadget I tried once broke on its second use and was more frustrating than helpful.

If you’ve had success with similar tools, share your tips in the comments!

Lighting is Key:

One thing I didn’t mention earlier but is very important is to make sure you have good lighting while you’re sewing.

Good lighting is key when you are threading sewing needles.

Use a task lamp, natural light, or any bright light source to illuminate your workspace.

Proper lighting helps you see the needle and thread clearly, making the process easier.

threading sewing needles

Sewing Machine Needle Insertion Tool:

Have you ever noticed a little tool that came with your machine that looks like this, and wondered what on earth it was for?

Sometimes it’s attached to a little brush or is just a standalone device with a small hole at one end.

If you don’t have one or can’t find yours, you can get one here.

threading sewing needles

Here’s how to use it: find the back of your needle (it is the side that is flat) then insert the needle so the flat side is facing to the back into the hole of the tool until it’s snug.

This gadget makes it much easier to place your needle in your machine and ensures it’s properly aligned.

Stick the needle up until it stops, tighten your needle bolt, and pull the tool away—your needle should be perfectly in place!

Have fun sewing!

jan3

Share:

Facebook
Twitter
Pinterest

Connect:

Picture of Jan Howell

Jan Howell

Whether it’s a new recipe, a fun craft, or some handy tips for your garden and home, I hope to empower and inspire you with skills that you can use to create joy, improved health, and to do it in a simple way.

Read More

How To Make Soft Fabric Baby Blocks | Simple Sewing Project

fabric blocks
baby blocks

Are you looking for a unique and easy-to-make baby gift? In this post, I show you how to create soft fabric blocks that are perfect for little hands to hold, shake, and play with.

This is a fun and quick sewing project that even beginners can handle.

Fabric Blocks Materials You’ll Need:

  • Six different fabric prints
  • Quilter’s cotton works great, but you can also use corduroy, denim, flannel, upcycled sweaters, or t-shirts.
  • Stabilizer: Fusible fleece is recommended, especially for lighter fabrics like cotton. Use heavier-weight fleece for quilter’s cotton.
  • Pattern: Use the measurements given or you can download and print the pattern (which includes two different types of balls) I’ve provided a link below with various block sizes and additional fabric ball patterns.
  • Pins/fabric clips (optional)
  • Needle and thread
  • Turning stick
  • Iron/Ironing board
  • Fiberfill stuffing
  • Optional: A jingle bell to add a fun sound element.

Step 1: Prepare Your Fabric

Cut out six fabric squares, each 5×5 inches, and six pieces of fusible fleece, each 4.5×4.5 inches.

fabric blocks fleece

Attach the fusible fleece to the wrong side of each fabric square, centering it to leave a quarter-inch seam allowance around the edges.

(The bumpy side of the fleece is the side that is applied to the fabric).

Press the fleece onto the fabric using a wool and steam setting for a secure bond.

fabric blocks

Step 2: Assemble the Fabric Blocks

Lay out your fabric squares in a line, arranging them to ensure that no two similar colors are next to each other.

fabric blocks seams
fabric blocks order

Start by sewing the squares together, leaving a quarter-inch unsewn at the top and bottom of each seam.

This gap will be essential for assembling the block correctly later.

Step 3: Sew the Squares Together

Begin by sewing the sides of the block first. Place the right sides of two squares together and sew along the edge, backstitching at the start and end.

Repeat this process for the remaining squares to create the sides of your block.

fabric blocks circle box

Place the two side block pieces on the end of the row right sides together and sew a seam to make a circle (box).
(Leave a ¼ inch allowance at the beginning and end of the seam).

fabric blocks tagIf you want to add a tag to the fabric blocks, this is a great time to do so. Baste the tag in place before sewing one of the side seams. 

LEARN HOW TO MAKE YOUR OWN TAGS/LABELS HERE.

 

fabric blocks side seams

Step 4: Sewing the Sides of the Fabric Blocks

Sew the side seams in the manner shown in the picture above. Leave ¼ inch at the beginning and end of the seams.

fabric blocks box
This will form a box.

Step 4: Form the Box

Once the sides are sewn, attach the top and bottom squares.

Remember to leave a small section unsewn on one side to allow for turning the fabric blocks right side out later.

fabric blocks top seams

Step 5: Sewing Top of the Box to the Sides

Now it’s time to sew the top of the fabric blocks to the sides.

Place one side piece together with the corresponding top side. Line up fabric edges and sew starting from the already sewn edge to the other sewn seam.

fabric blocks top

Leave an opening on one of the sides.

Make sure to backstitch at the beginning and end of these seams.


After sewing one side, flip the fabric pieces to align the edges of the fabric and the end of the corners. Do this for all sides to form a box.

fabric blocks stuffing

Step 6: Turn and Stuff the Fabric Blocks

Turn the block right side out through the opening. Use a turning stick to push out the corners, making sure they’re crisp.

fabric blocks jingle bellStuff the block with fiberfill, adding a jingle bell if you like. Continue stuffing until the block is firm but still soft and squishy.

Step 7: Close the Opening

Thread a needle and use a slip stitch to close the opening.

For more detailed instructions on how to sew a slip stitch, go here, or watch the video below.

This stitch will keep your seam neat and invisible.

Once the seam is closed, tie off the thread, hide the knot, and trim the thread.

baby blocks

And there you have it, soft, squishy fabric blocks that makes a wonderful gift for any baby.

Get out your sewing machine, some fabric scraps, and a little stuffing, and make these adorable blocks for the next baby gift you need.

fabric blocks and ball pattern

Look how cute the fabric balls are. Babies love these toys!

LEARN HOW TO MAKE A PENTAGON BALL AND A BABY BEACH BALL

Happy sewing!

 

Have fun sewing!

jan3

Share:

Facebook
Twitter
Pinterest

Connect:

Picture of Jan Howell

Jan Howell

Whether it’s a new recipe, a fun craft, or some handy tips for your garden and home, I hope to empower and inspire you with skills that you can use to create joy, improved health, and to do it in a simple way.

Read More

How To Make Reusable Snack Bags / Simple Sewing Tutorial

diy snack bags

Do you find yourself using a lot of plastic Ziploc bags for lunches and snacks? Think about the waste, especially if you’re packing lunches for kids every day. I have an alternative that I think you will like. My new snack bag pattern and video tutorial will help reduce some of that waste by making your own washable, reusable snack bags.

diy snack bags

Why Make Your Own Snack Bags?

Here are a few statistics to bring to your awareness:

1- Scale of Plastic Production: Plastics, including bags, have become a significant part of our daily lives, with half of all plastics ever produced being made in the last 15 years. Single-use plastics, like bags, are particularly concerning because they are used for a short time but can persist in the environment for hundreds of years.

2- Environmental Impact: Every year, approximately 8 million tons of plastic waste enter the oceans from coastal nations. This amount is akin to placing five garbage bags of plastic waste on every foot of the world’s coastlines. Plastics often contain additives that make them more durable, leading to decomposition times of up to 400 years or more. This longevity means they accumulate in natural habitats, disrupting ecosystems and harming wildlife.

(Environmental Protection Agency)​​

3- Human Health Concerns: Plastics and microplastics have been found in human organs such as the liver, kidneys, and placenta. Additionally, the chemicals used in plastics can leach into food and water, potentially leading to health issues like developmental, reproductive, and neurological disorders.

4- Ingestion: Animals frequently mistake plastic particles for food. For example, sea turtles often consume plastic bags, mistaking them for jellyfish, one of their primary food sources. Ingested plastics can cause physical harm, block digestive tracts, reduce the urge to eat, and lead to starvation or malnutrition. Additionally, microplastics, which are tiny fragments resulting from the breakdown of larger plastic debris, have been found in over 100 aquatic species, including fish and shellfish consumed by humans​ (Environmental Protection Agency)​​ (UNEP – UN Environment Programme)​.

5- Plastics contain and absorb harmful chemicals, such as polychlorinated biphenyls (PCBs), pesticides, and heavy metals. These chemicals can leach out of the plastic into the tissues of animals that ingest them, leading to potential toxic effects. Such contamination can impact the endocrine system, reproductive health, and overall survival of wildlife​ (UNEP – UN Environment Programme)​.

DIY SNACK BAGS

I think that is enough information to convince you that making reusable snack bags is a great idea.

Snack Bag Ribbon Loop Convenience

These snack bags have convenient ribbon loops for easy opening and in addition, have a box bottom design that makes filling and accessing your snacks a breeze.

This makes it so nice when you’re filling the snack bags or when you need to grab your hand in and get something; the goodies you have inside will not fall out and spill all over.

Plus, they’re washable, waterproof, and one-of-a-kind!

https://geni.us/XONvIP4The PULL (Polyurethane laminate fabric) recommended for this project is non-toxic, food-grade fabric, and washable.
You can get this fabric here, or some stores have it in stock.

These snack bags are perfect for:

  • kids to take to school
    to keep in your purse or car
  • hikes
  • beach trips, etc.
diy snack bags

This is a great project if you’re new to sewing or looking for a quick project.

In the pattern and tutorial I provide measurements for two different sizes, and if you’re like me and prefer having a printout of the instructions, here is the link to the pattern.

Have fun making snack bags!

jan3snack 

Share:

Facebook
Twitter
Pinterest

Connect:

Picture of Jan Howell

Jan Howell

Whether it’s a new recipe, a fun craft, or some handy tips for your garden and home, I hope to empower and inspire you with skills that you can use to create joy, improved health, and to do it in a simple way.

Read More

8 Sewing Tips and Hacks for Beginners / My Best Top 8

8 best sewing tips

If you are new to sewing or have been sewing for a long time, there are always some new sewing tips and hacks that could make your sewing experience easier and more enjoyable.


In this post, I share with you my top eight sewing tips.

8 best sewing tips hand weight

1. Preventing Ruler Slippage

This tip is a game-changer if you use a rotary cutter, mat, and ruler. When making long cuts, your ruler may slide, even if you press down firmly.

The solution? A simple five-pound hand weight. That’s it.

What do you do with it? Place the weight on the end of the ruler to keep it in place. This prevents any slipping or sliding and ensures straight cuts every time.

I keep my weight on my sewing table whenever I’m getting ready to cut.

sewing tips

2. Starting and Ending Seams on Knit and Lightweight Fabrics

Starting a seam on knit or lightweight fabrics without the fabric getting sucked into the machine can be challenging. 

You get bunched up fabric, and sometimes it will even make a hole in your fabric. OUCH!

I have the perfect little gadget that will cost you nothing and save you so much grief.

It’s just a piece of scrap fabric about 2 x 2 inches. When you start a seam, sew onto the scrap first and then put the end of the fabric against it.

sewing tipsThis keeps the presser foot level and allows the feed dogs to move the fabric through without getting it sucked down into the machine. (I’m sure you’ve experienced it). It is so frustrating.

It will also ensure a smooth start and finish to your seams.

sewing  tips scraps ***I keep many scrap pieces close to my machine in a little pouch on my sewing supply holder.

You can use the same scrap piece over and over again.

sewing tips bulky seams

3. Sewing Over Bulky Seams


When sewing over bulky seams, such as denim or fleece, skipped stitches and uneven stitches can be a problem.

To prevent this, all you need to do is keep the presser foot level by placing something under the back of the foot.

You can use a “hump jumper,” a folded piece of cereal box, or even an emery board.

Alternatively, some machines have a leveling button on the presser foot to help maintain an even stitch.

When you come to the bulky seam, slide the device under the back of the presser foot and start sewing. This will allow the feed dogs to pull the fabric evenly without skipping stitches.

Then, when you continue to sew and go off the bulky seam, the device will simply fall away or the button will pop back out, disengaging it.

4. Using Painter’s Tape or Masking Tape

I know this may seem like a strange thing to have in your sewing kit, but painter’s tape or masking tape can be incredibly useful in sewing projects. It’s one of my favorite sewing tips!

To mark the seam allowance on your sewing machin

  • As a guide to sew straight lines instead of using chalks or pens.
  • Seam Allowances and Straight Lines
  • Use it to mark your seam allowances on your sewing machine
  • As a temporary hold for fabric pieces 
sewing tips topstitching

5. Top Stitching without Thread Bunching

Top stitching adds a professional touch to your projects, but threads can bunch up and knot at the start and look really messy.

sewing tips starting seamTo avoid this, adjust your stitch length from 2.5 to 3 and gently pull back the threads from the needle and bobbin when you begin stitching. Take a few stitches and let them go.

This prevents bunching and ensures a clean finish start.

sewing tips sewing foot pedal

6. Keeping Your Sewing Pedal in Place

If your sewing pedal keeps sliding away while you work, place a piece of rubbery shelf liner under it.

sewing tips shelf linerThis will keep the pedal in place and prevent it from moving around.

Here’s a sewing tip for those of you with a carpet surface: You can apply a few pieces of sticky back Velcro to the pedal (the prickly hook piece) to keep it from slipping around.

sewing tips threading machine

7. Troubleshooting Funky Stitches


If your machine starts acting up and the stitches start looking a little wonky, the simplest solution is often to re-thread your sewing machine. It’s as simple as that.

Ensure you’re threading the machine correctly according to the instructions in your sewing machine manual, and check your bobbin.

This quick fix can solve many common stitching problems.

***If you still are having issues, check out my tutorial on

Troubleshooting 3 Common Sewing Machine Problems | Sew Simple Series Lesson #7

 

 

sewing tips serger thread

8. Managing Serger Tails

For those of you who use a serger, here is a tip to avoid leaving those obnoxious tails when starting or ending a seam with a serger.

Start sewing about half an inch. Stop and lift the presser foot. Pull the tail to the front and under the presser foot so that when you continue to sew, the tail will be reinforced by sewing over it and then cut off.

sewing tips sergerAt the end of a seam, sew to the end of the fabric, maybe one stitch off the fabric, then lift the presser foot, pull the fabric back slightly, flip it over, and align the edge with the needle before continuing to sew. Sew a few inches, then veer quickly off.

Cut your threads. This technique results in a neat finish without loose tails.

Feel free to share your experiences, ask questions, or comment below.

I would love to hear some of your sewing tips.

 

Have fun sewing!

jan3

Share:

Facebook
Twitter
Pinterest

Connect:

Picture of Jan Howell

Jan Howell

Whether it’s a new recipe, a fun craft, or some handy tips for your garden and home, I hope to empower and inspire you with skills that you can use to create joy, improved health, and to do it in a simple way.

Read More

How To Make an Eyeglass Case | Sunglass Case | Quick and Simple Project

DIY FABRIC SUNGLASS CASE

In this blog post, I show you how to make a super cute eyeglass and sunglass case. These cases are quite simple to make and require just a little bit of fabric making them a great project to use up your fabric scrap.

This is a beginner sewing project that is fun and quite addicting. I dare you to make just one.

Eyeglass Case Materials and Supplies Needed

  • Sewing machine
  • Fabric: Solid pieces, prints, or scraps sewn together
  • Rotary cutter (or scissors if you don’t have a rotary cutter)
  • Fabric scissors
  • Fabric clips (or straight pins)
  • Writing device: Pen or pencil
  • Turning stick (or point turner)
  • Universal needle: Size 80 or 90
  • Fabric stabilizer: Soft and stable, cotton batting or flannel
  • Seam ripper
  • Iron and ironing board
  • Labels (optional for a custom touch)
SUNGLASS CASE

Eyeglass Case Instructions

Step 1: Prepare the Fabric

Cutting Out

  • Outside piece: 7 by 7.5 inches.
  • Lining piece: 7 by 9.75 inches.
  • Stabilizer: 7 by 7 inches.

Step 2: Assemble the Case

Measure and Mark

  • Measure one inch down on the stabilizer for a seam allowance line.
  • Place the lining piece right side up and the outside piece right side down, and align the 7-inch ends together.
  • Place the stabilizer on top and clip everything in place.
SUNGLASS CASE

 Sew the Top Seam:

  • Using a straight stitch, sew along the drawn line. (No need to backstitch).
  • Press the Seam
  • Open the sewn pieces and press the seam with an iron.
SUNGLASS CASE LABEL

Step 3: Add a Label (Optional)

Insert Label

  • Fold the label in half with the raw edges facing outward.
  • Baste the label in place. (This will be worth the time taken, trust me).

LEARN HOW TO MAKE YOUR OWN LABELS HERE.

  • Open up the pieces of fabric and give the seam edge a good press.
  • Then, fold the lining over so the wrong sides are facing each other. 
  • Line up the side and bottom edges. Press the top fold.
SUNGLASS CASE

Step 4: Sew the Edges

  • Fold the panel in half horizontally, lining up seam and binding.
  • Pin or clip in place.
  • Using a 3/8 inch seam allowance, sew around the panel leaving about a 3 inch gap unsewn for turning.
  • Start sewing from the lining side, backstitching at the start and end, and leave the 3-inch gap unsewn.sunglass case
  • Clip the corners without cutting into the seam.

***TIP: Fold and press the opening seam allowances before turning. This will make it a lot easier.

sunglass case

Step 5: Turn

  • Turn the case right side out through the 3-inch gap.
  • Use a turning stick to poke out the corners and ensure the foam lays flat.
sunglass case

Step 6: Sewing Opening Closed

  • Press the outer fabric edges and corners, taking care not to let the iron touch your label.
  • Fold the pre-pressed seam allowance inside and line up the folded edges.
  • Clip in place.
  • Topstitch along the edge to close the opening.
sunglass case

Step 7: Final Touches

  • Insert the lining into the sunglass case.sunglass case pressing
  • Press the top edge for a neat finish.
sunglass case finished

Imagine all the fun color combinations you can use.

You can even add a snap if you want, but I’ve found that the case holds snugly without one.

Enjoy your new, custom-made eyeglass or sunglass case!

diy sunglass case styles

You can also make the outer panels using two other methods: sew-as-you-go fabric strip quilting and scrappy fabric panels.

The sunglass case video below will show these methods.

Share:

Facebook
Twitter
Pinterest

Connect:

Picture of Jan Howell

Jan Howell

Whether it’s a new recipe, a fun craft, or some handy tips for your garden and home, I hope to empower and inspire you with skills that you can use to create joy, improved health, and to do it in a simple way.

Read More

Related Posts

How To Make a Waterproof Baby Changing Mat / Simple Sewing Tutorial

baby changing mat
BABY CHANGING MAT

In this simple sewing tutorial, I show you how you can make a waterproof baby changing mat.

changing mat diaper bagIt’s the perfect size that you can fold up and throw in your diaper bag. 

They’re easy to wash and really easy to make and they make really fun baby shower gifts.

I’m going to show you two different methods that you can use to finish the edge of the changing mat: how to apply double fold bias tape with a mitered corner edge and how to sew a very simple unbound edge.

baby changing mat supplies

CHANGING MAT MATERIALS & ITEMS NEEDED

  • ½ yard waterproof PUL fabric ( polyurethane laminate)
  • It’s a fabric that has one side that’s woven and one side that’s plasticky and waterproof.

You can find this online or at most fabric stores. Sometimes they’ll have prints, but most likely you’ll just be able to find a white, which is just fine.

When you buy the pull fabric it comes on a bolt that’s really wide, almost 60 inches wide.

You can make several of mats if you buy a 1/2 of a yard of the pull fabric.

  • ½ yard flannel or cotton print fabric or fabric cut to (25 x 18 inches)
  • fusible fleece or light colored flannel cut to (25 x 18 inches) for lining

tip

I like using an upcycled fabric when I can. For this changing mat project I used a flannel sheet that was white and of good quality that I no longer needed.

  • double fold bias tape (2 ½ -3 yards) OPTIONAL
  • fabric clips (pins will put holes in the PUL fabric)
  • scissors/rotary cutter, mat and ruler (optional)
  • iron/ironing board
  • sewing machine
  • turning stick
  • label/tag (optional)
how to make your own bias tape binding

***LEARN HOW TO MAKE YOUR OWN BIAS TAPE HERE

If you’ve been intimidated by bias tape and haven’t applied that yet, no worries, I’ll show you how easy it is to apply.

After seeing this tutorial I hope that you’ll find it’s really easy because it does add a lot of charm to your projects.

INSTRUCTIONS

Simple Unbound Changing Mat

CHANGING PAD FUSIBLE FLEECE1- Fusible Fleece Application

The first thing to do, if you’re using fusible fleece, is to iron that to the back side of your front piece of fabric. (bumpy side of fleece will be facing down).

One thing to mention though is you do not want to iron on any of the fusible fleece directly on that bumpy side or the sticky stuff will get onto your iron.

2- Tag/label Application (optional)

If you are wanting to add a tag, to the mat, this is the time to do it.

The cut edge of the tag will be along the raw edge of the fabric.

adding tag changing matThe seam allowance is 3/8 inches, so take note of that when placing the tag in place.

Clip the tag in place and then take the time to go to the sewing machine and baste that in place. You’ll be glad you did.

changing mat fabric sandwich

3- Making a Fabric Sandwich

Now you are ready to make a fabric sandwich and sew it all together.

If you are going to use a flannel lining, place that on the table first.

Then place the front piece on top of that with the WRONG SIDE FACING DOWN.

The pul fabric goes next with the RIGHT SIDE FACING DOWN.

HOW TO DETERMINE WHICH SIDE IS THE RIGHT SIDE OF PUL FABRIC:

Look real closely and you can see that the WRONG SIDE has a pattern to it (grain of fabric weave).

THE RIGHT SIDE is more shiny and a little bit more plasticky looking with a smooth finish.

Line up the edges and clip all three layers in place.

changing mat sewing

4- Sewing the Changing Mat Together

This first basic method you’ll sew all the way around, leaving a 4 inch gap unsewn for turning. Really simple.

Backstitch at the beginning and end of the seam using a 3/8 inch seam allowance.

The straight stitch is 2.5 in length.

Sew to the corner, stopping 3/8 inch from the edge. Leave the needle in the down position, lift up your presser foot and pivot the fabric to continue sewing all the way around.

clip corners changing mat

5- Clip the Corners.

changing mat

6- Turning Right Side Facing Out

Find the opening. Reach inside between where the right side is facing right side, and pull it out.

Take the turning stick and poke the corners out.

changing mat pressing

7- Pressing the Edges Out

Take it to the ironing board. DON NOT PRESS THE PUL FABRIC! It will melt.

Fold the edges of the opening up, the same seam allowance and press. Apply a few clips to hold it in place.

BE CAREFUL NOT TO PRESS THE LABEL IF YOU HAVE ONE!

topstitching changing mat

8- Top Stitching the Changing Mat

Okay, now we’re ready to topstitch all the way around the changing mat.

Change the stitch length to 3 instead of 2.5. This will give you a much better finished look.

The seam allowance will only be 1/8 inch. (You can apply a strip of tape on your sewing machine to help as a guide. (watch video tutorial for the details).

Clip the threads.

Wasn’t that simple?

mitered corner changing mat

CHANGING MAT BIAS TAPE METHOD

Let’s start on the second method, which is applying a mitered corner with double fold bias tape.

I am going to go over the basics here in this post, but you can watch the video tutorial here to get all the details and tips.

For this changing mat, I chose a cute orange flannel polka dot fabric with stripe bias tape that I made.

I used a rabbit tag, from my LOVE LABELS collection. (you can get the PDF file here).

CHANGING MAT

1- Making the Fabric Sandwich

***THE FABRIC WILL BE PLACED IN A DIFFERENT ORDER FOR THIS METHOD!

Layer 1: Pul fabric (right side facing down)

Layer 2: Fusible fleece ironed on the back of front piece or flannel fabric

Layer 3: Front fabric (right side facing up)

2- Fabric Prep

Line up all the edges. You may need to trim some of the edges so they are even.

Flip the fabrics over to make sure the Pul fabric is not bunched up.

Once it is lined up, clip in place.

Using a long stitch (basing stitch) sew all the way around using a ¼ inch seam allowance.

This step will save you a lot of grief and is worth the time to do.

It will keep the three layers stable while you put on the bias tape.

3-  Tag/label Application (optional)

Add the tag now if you want one. 

3- Bias Tape Application

Apply the bias tape to the back side (Pul fabric side first, and then you will wrap the tape around to the front, and then top stitch it.

WATCH THE VIDEO FOR COMPLETE DETAILS AND TIPS!

This little changing mat is the perfect size to use, fold up and toss them in your diaper bag.

I hope you enjoyed that tutorial!

baby gift changning mat and burp clothMake up a few and add some burp cloths and you have the perfect baby gift!

burp clothes chaning matI have a tutorial showing you how to make these burp cloths (which are super simple to make!

Share:

Facebook
Twitter
Pinterest

Connect:

Picture of Jan Howell

Jan Howell

Whether it’s a new recipe, a fun craft, or some handy tips for your garden and home, I hope to empower and inspire you with skills that you can use to create joy, improved health, and to do it in a simple way.

Read More

Make Your Own Adorable Bias Tape Binding the Easy Way

diy bias tape binding
how to make your own bias tape binding

Bias tape binding is used in a lot of sewing projects, and I love working with it. But did you know that you can make your own?

Why would you want to make your own bias tape when you can go to the fabric store and buy a package of bias tape already made?

bias tape at the store

If you’ve ever gone to the fabric store to buy bias tape, you’ll notice that they only come in a selective amount of solid colors, and that’s boring!

You’ll find the color to match your sewing project fabric if you’re lucky.

What you’re not going to see is bias tape that is made from cute colored prints.

FAT QUARTER BIAS TAPE binding

In this post, I’m going to show you how you can get five yards of bias tape binding by using just ONE fat quarter of fabric. Making bias tape is quite simple.

It only takes about 30 minutes to make five yards.

I’ll show you how to make a single fold bias tape, a double fold bias tape, and bias strips for binding a quilt.

Be sure to watch the video tutorial at the end of the post because I show you throughout the video several different tips that maybe you haven’t seen before, and I show you how I store and organize my bias tape.

I do have a previous post where I showed how to make bias tape using a different method and in that tutorial, I go over in more detail what bias tape is, and what it’s used for, so you might want to check that out.

Watch the video tutorial at the end of the post because I show you several different tips throughout the video that you haven’t seen before, and I show you how I store and organize my bias tape.

In a previous post, I showed how to make bias tape using a different method, and in that tutorial, I went over in more detail what bias tape is and what it’s used for, so you should check that out.

 

bias tape binding supplies

Bias Tape Binding Materials and Items Needed

Bias Tape Instructions

1 -Fabric Prep

The first thing that you’ll do is press the fabric to get the wrinkles out.

If using a FAT QUARTER, which usually measures around 21×18 inches, you’ll need to cut it into a square. (18×18 inches).

bias tape binding

FAT QUARTER INSTRUCTIONS

***If you’ve cut your fabric 18x 18, you’ll, you’ll skip this part.

Place the fabric with the RIGHT SIDE FACING UP.

Square up the fabric by bringing the short edge to the long edge.

Line up the edges so it makes a perfect triangle. (You may need to straighten off the edges because they don’t always cut it straight at the fabric store).

Cut off the excess. So that you have a piece of fabric 18×18 inches. It can be bigger or smaller, it just needs to be square.

cutter blad tipIf it’s been a while since you’ve changed your rotary cutter blade, you may want to do that. I have a post showing you all about rotary cutters, including changing the blade.

It makes a big difference if you have a sharp blade.

You can READ THIS POST for more details about “how to change the blade”.

bias tape binding folded triangle

2 -Cutting Two Triangles

Before you open the triangle up, cut the fabric into two separate triangles.

Cut it along the fold of the triangle.

Take your scissors, lay them flat like this, and push them out onto the fold.

Cut down all the way with the flat edge of your scissors on the table.

bias tape binding

Flip both layers of fabric to the right.

Take the top layer and flip it to the right

Line the top edges up. Leave an ¼ inch tail on that side where indicated in the photo.

Pin it in place.

bias tape binding seam allowance guide

3 -Sewing the bias tape binding fabric.

You can put a quarter-inch presser foot on your sewing machine, but if your sewing machine doesn’t come with a quarter-inch presser foot, you can take a piece of masking tape, washi tape, or painter’s tape and put it down on that quarter inch seam marking on your sewing machine plate.

bias tape binding top seam

Sew the top edge using a quarter-inch seam allowance.

Change the stitch length to a 2 instead of a 2.5. This will keep the stitches just a little bit more secure.

***Check out the video for a great tip on starting a seam without the fabric bunching up.

bias tape pressing

4 -Press the seam allowance open.

bias trape binding drawing lines

5 -Marking the bias tape strips

Place the wrong side facing up and mark two-inch strips starting at the bottom of the fabric and work your way up until you’ve filled the fabric with 2-inch increments.

Cut off the remaining fabric.

bias tape binding excess

These two-inch strips will make a double-fold bias tape that measures 1/2 inch or one-inch single-fold bias tape.

Of course, you can make bigger strips of bias tape if you want.

The lines must be accurate.

6 -Sewing the bias tape fabric

DO NOT CUT STRIPS YET!

bias tape lining up linesFlip the right side facing up. Bring the ends towards the center. (You think you would just line up the lines straight across, right? But you don’t.

You’re going to shift the lines up one row, then line up the lines.

This is where the magic happens!

quarter inch ext bias tapeFind the point on the left piece of fabric. That point needs to extend past the line underneath by ¼ inch.

Pin the edges in place, careful not to pull the top or bottom fabric tighter than the other.

Go to the sewing machine and sew down that side using an ¼ inch seam allowance. No need to backstitch.

It will seem a little awkward, and it won’t lay flat; it will look like the photo above.

press bias tape seamPress the seam open.

***If you’ve ever made bias tape binding where you cut a bunch of strips sewn them together individually, and then pressed each individual strip seam allowance open, then you know how tedious it can be.

It also takes a lot more time. This way you have such nice, neatly pressed seam allowances.

It’s the easiest way to make bias tape!

***If you’ve ever made bias tape where you cut a bunch of strips sewn them together individually, and then pressed each individual strip seam allowance open, then you know how tedious it can be.

It also takes a lot more time. This way you have such nice, neatly pressed seam allowances.

It’s the easiest way to make bias tape!

butting bias tape strips

7 -Cutting bias tape binding strips

Start cutting the strips by following the lines.

Continue cutting until you have five yards of bias tape.

Ta-da!

bias tape binding types

There are three types of bias tape, bias strips for binding without a fold, single fold and double fold bias tape.

8 -Unpressed bias strips

Simply leave it unpressed or just fold it in half, then place it on mini bolts ready for use.

bias tape binding folding

9 -Making single-fold bias tape (manually without bias tape maker)

Fold the bias tape strip in half. Then bring the edges together in the center and press the outer folds.

Continue that process until you have pressed the whole strip.

bias tape binding maker

10-Double fold tape using the bias tape maker

This little tool is so handy!

They come in several sizes, and for this project, I am using the “blue tool”.

Slide the point of one of the points into the tool. Sometimes, it’s a little challenging to get it to come out.

Just take a pin and kind of cinch that up through that slit that’s on top of the tool.

Gently start pulling the fabric through the tool, and it will start folding the fabric sides in.

bias tape binding single fold

Start pressing it as you pull.

When you go over the seams, you may have to fuss with it just a little bit, and it can be a little annoying, but stick with it because, in the long run, it’s so worth it.

Continue to do that until the whole strip is folded.

I like to leave my strips wide because I don’t want that fold in some projects when I’m using a double, especially if I’m going around corners or things.

11- Double fold bias tape binding without the tool

To make double-fold bias tape, fold it in half again and press it in place. That’s it.

storing bias tape

How to store and organize your bias tape strips

I use comic boards to store my small pieces of fabric, as I’ve shown in this post.

These comic boards work well to also store bias tape.

1 – Making bias tape bolts.

Cut the boards. 5 X 2.5 inches. (This is the same size board that come with your store bought bias tape.)

bias tape binding mini bold

2 – Folding bias tape on boards

Take your bias tape strip and start wrapping it around the board. You don’t want to pull it too tight.

Tuck the end under the already wrapped tape.

I found the perfect box matching the bins I used to put my small fabric bolts on.

YOU CAN GET THEM HERE

They fit in these boxes perfectly!

BIAS TAPE binding CABINET

They have adhesive strips on the back so you can hang them on your sewing wall or inside a cabinet door like mine.

It’s eye candy for my sewing room.

Share:

Facebook
Twitter
Pinterest

Connect:

Picture of Jan Howell

Jan Howell

Whether it’s a new recipe, a fun craft, or some handy tips for your garden and home, I hope to empower and inspire you with skills that you can use to create joy, improved health, and to do it in a simple way.

Read More

HOW TO SEW A SCRAPPY FABRIC STUFFED HEART / EASY PROJECT

scrappy fabric stuffed heart
stuffed heart

In this post, I’m going to show you how to sew a scrappy fabric stuffed heart. In a previous post, I gave instructions showing how to make scrappy fabric panels that you can use to make these adorable stuffed hearts.

This is a beginner sewing project that is fun and quite addicting.

What you’ll really like about this sewing tutorial is I will show you a way to sew two pieces of fabric together that are small shapes and have small seam allowances.

This is a method that maybe you haven’t seen before and will make this process so much easier and take the frustration out of sewing small pieces together.

Stuffed heart materials

Stuffed Heart Materials and Supplies

Stuffed Heart Instructions

1 -Decide which shape of heart you want to use.

You can trace a heart cookie cutter or use the FREE HEART TEMPLATE I HAVE CREATED FOR YOU.

Download it HERE.

2 -Trace the heart onto the back of the scrappy fabric panel.

I have used a fusible fleece on the back of my scrappy fabric panels as shown in the photo.

It’s unnecessary, but it gives the fabric more stability and something flat to trace the hearts with.

You can make these stuffed hearts any size.

You must leave at least a 1/4″ space around the heart for the seam allowance.

Don’t bring the heart’s edge right to the fabric’s edge.

If you’d like to learn how to make the panels, check out this post and video tutorial.

I would save even the little scraps because you could use them to make a cute cutout to place on a gift card or something.

scrappy fabric stuffed heart

There are so many fun things you can do with this scrappy fabric.

If you use pre-made scrappy fabric panels, you’ll want to optimize and use as much of the panel as possible.

DO NOT CUT OUT YET!

You will sew around the heart first, then cut it out. This method is SO MUCH EASIER and less frustrating.

stuffed heart tracing

3 -Sewing the stuffed heart

Place the backing fabric RIGHT SIDE FACING UP.

Then place the fabric panel or heat front fabric RIGHT SIDE FACING DOWN and pin it in place.

Leave a space down on the bottom of the heart, about one and a half to two inches, for stuffing the heart, and then we’ll sew that closed when we’re finished.

stuffed heart

Backstitch at the beginning and at the end of the seam.

When sewing around the curves, if you need to leave the needle down and lift up the presser foot and adjust it just a little bit to get around that corner, you can do that. Just go slow.

When at the V in the heart, leave the needle down, lift up your presser foot, and pivot it. Then, continue to sew.

***You could also use a needle and thread if you don’t have a sewing machine. (I do have some tutorials showing you some stitches that you can use to hand sew).

trimming the stuffed heart

4 -Trimming the heart seam allowance

Cut around the heart, leaving a ¼ inch seam allowance.

Clip notches around the curves and a straight cut at the heart notch.

Take care to NOT cut into the seam.

stuffed heart seam allowance

5 -Turn the heart inside out

Take the turning stick and turn the heart right side facing out.

pressing stuffed heartPoke out the points and smooth the curves. (I like pressing the ¼-inch seam allowance so it’s easier to sew the heart closed).

stuffed heart

6 – Stuff the heart

Fill the heart with stuffing, using the turning stick to push the stuffing into points and curves.

7 – Sewing the stuffed heart closed

To sew the heart closed, take the needle, double-thread it, and knot the end.

Take the needle and insert it just at the bottom of where you finished stitching from the wrong side of the fabric to the front, leaving the knot inside the heart.

Fold the ¼ inch seam allowance inside and pin in place.

Using a ladder stitch or slip stitch, sew the opening closed.

If you’d like to watch a quick tutorial showing how to do this, YOU CAN FIND IT HERE.

stuffed heart ribbon

8 – Adding a ribbon or twine to hang the stuffed heart (optional)

If you want to hang the heart, use a thin ribbon, jute, or yarn.

Decide how long you want it to be.

Thread the yarn needle and insert it into the notch of the heart.

Pull it through and take the needle off the ribbon.

stuffed heart ribbon loop

Make a knot at the bottom and then make another knot further up to create a loop.

You can tie a bow if desired.

Ideas of how to display and use the stuffed heartsstuffed heart doorknob

Hang it over a doorknob or a peg.

stuffed heart gift bagAttach it to a gift bag

stuffed heartHang on a bulletin board

stuffed heart bowlDisplayed in a bowl or a basket

Put in a valentine envelope

Fill a portion of it with some dried lavender buds to make a yummy-smelling sachet

Make a pincushion by filling it with crushed walnut shells and stuffing

stuffed heart broachSew a broach pin on the back to put on a shirt or sweater.

stuffed heart basket

There you have it.

Are you ready to get out your sewing machine, gather up some of your fabric scraps and make a cute scrappy fabric stuffed heart?

Please comment or send me a note if you have any questions.

Share:

Facebook
Twitter
Pinterest

Connect:

Picture of Jan Howell

Jan Howell

Whether it’s a new recipe, a fun craft, or some handy tips for your garden and home, I hope to empower and inspire you with skills that you can use to create joy, improved health, and to do it in a simple way.

Read More

10 DIY Gift Ideas That You’re Going To Enjoy Making

GIFT IDEAS

Christmas is just around the corner. Are you looking for some fun gift ideas that you can make?

There’s no better time to show your loved ones you care than with a special, handmade gift this holiday season.

DIY gifts don’t have to be complicated or time consuming.

Here are 10 easy and affordable DIY Christmas gift ideas that will be sure to make your loved ones smile.

Most, if not all, of these projects are doable for even a beginner seamstress and a lot of them have a video tutorial available for those who are visual learners.

10 Gift Ideas

gift iedeas diy ZIPPER POUCH

1- Zipper Pouches

Putting in a zipper can seem overwhelming and intimidating, but once you sew a zipper using the techniques in this video, you’ll realize how fun it really is and want to make more!

These zipper pouches can be made any size and are great for holding cosmetics, pencils and pens, and whatever you have that need a little pouch for.

Watch the video tutorial HERE. 

 

Get the pattern HERE. 

gift ideas PILLOWCASE BURRITO

2- Cuffed Pillow Case

Making a pillowcase is a fun and simple beginner sewing project, and in this tutorial, I will show you how to add a contrasting cuff using the burrito method.

It only requires a yard of fabric and about 15 minutes to make.

I’ll show you how to make them using a sewing machine, and a serger, and how to sew a French seam if you choose.

You can also add a small strip of trim if you want and I’ll show you how easy it is to do that.

A cozy pillowcase is the perfect gift for your grand kids.

Video and Pattern links are in this blog post.

gift ideas diy utility apron

3- Utility Apron

These DIY Utility Aprons are not only cute to wear, but they are also so FUNCTIONAL!

In this sewing tutorial, I go over step-by-step instructions on how to make your own apron. These aprons are great to hold all kinds of items while going about your day in the home, garden, and office.

The multiple pockets are nice to hold pencil, pens, scissors, cell phones, garden gadgets, and whatever else you need to keep on hand.

I LOVE THIS APRON and wear one almost every day!

This is a fun sewing project and these aprons make great GIFTS!!!!

Get the free pillowcase sizing chart and video link HERE: 

4- Microwave Potato Bag

You know those times when you want to cook a baked potato, but you don’t have an hour or an hour and a half to spare?

No worries. I’ve got you covered.

In this DIY sewing tutorial, I show you how you can make a microwave baked potato bag. This is a super easy sewing project and these bags make the perfect baked potatoes. You can have a few baked potatoes cooked up in minutes.

We use ours ALL THE TIME!

Get all the details HERE: 

 

 

gift iideas gift card holder

5- Gift Card Holder

I you want to give a gift card as a gift, why not make a unique, homemade gift card holder to put it in?

They only take 10 minutes to make and it’s a project in that you can use up some of your fabric scraps.

Get all the details HERE:

6- Fingerless Gloves

These fleece fingerless gloves are the perfect thing when you want to keep your hands warm, but don’t want the bulk of a full-coverage mitten or glove.

Learn how easy it is to sew a pair in 10 minutes or less.

This sewing project only takes a minimal amount of fleece fabric, and can also be made from upcycled fleece clothing.

diy fleece neck warmerAdd a fleece neck warmer and you have a great Christmas gift.

Watch the video tutorial HERE.

 

Get the Pattern HERE

8- Pixie & Pilot Caps

Just in time for the cooler weather coming on, these cozy pixie & pilot caps are the perfect thing to keep your little ones ears nice and toasty!

These whimsical, but most importantly functional pixie and pilot caps were designed to fit snug around the face and tie comfortably under the chin.

GET ALL THE DETAILS HERE: 

gift ideas DIY DOG SWEATER

9- Dog Sweater

We can’t forget the dogs! Keep your pooch warm with style in an upcycled dog sweater.

My border collie actually likes wearing a sweater, even though with all that fluff, he really doesn’t need it.

However, there are some breeds of dogs that could use that extra layer in the cold winter months.

So if you have an old sweater kicking around, this is an easy sewing project that you can make in no time at all.

Even a beginner seamstress can make this.

I give instructions on how to make this with a regular sewing machine and a serger.

GET ALL THE DETAILS HERE

10- Foot Warmers

The weather is getting a little chilly.

Here is a fun little sewing project and gift idea for those wanting to keep their little tootsies warm.

My husband and I have been using these for years. I guess we have become wimps in our old age, because now we can’t go to bed without a heated corn bag in our bed.

We’ll heat one or two up and throw them under the covers a few minutes before we go to bed, then when we jump in, ohhhhhh nice and toasty.

These little bags are great for placing anywhere on your body that needs some soothing.

You can also place the bags in the freezer to use as a cold pack.

GET THE DETAILS HERE: 

Of course, there are a lot of other Christmas gift ideas on my site and YouTube channel, but hopefully this will get you excited and inspire you to take some time now before the holiday crazies set in to make some fun, unique gifts.

Have fun sewing!

jan3

Share:

Facebook
Twitter
Pinterest

Connect:

Picture of Jan Howell

Jan Howell

Whether it’s a new recipe, a fun craft, or some handy tips for your garden and home, I hope to empower and inspire you with skills that you can use to create joy, improved health, and to do it in a simple way.

Read More

DIY Garden Apron / Made From Recycled Jeans / Quick and Simple Project

DIY recycled jeans garaden apron

This DIY garden apron is a quick and simple project made from upcycled jeans. The apron is handy for working in the garden, around the house, and even as a vendor’s apron.

recycled jeans garden apron

As some of you know, I LOVE to recycle, especially a pair of jeans.

There are so many fun things you can make with denim. At the end of the post, I’ll give you some other project ideas where you can use a pair of recycled jeans.

You can get fancy and edge the bottom of the apron with bias tape, which is really easy to do, or you can just leave it and finish the edge with a serger or even just use a little fray check.

recycled jeans garden apron

Garden Apron Materials & Items Needed

Here are the items and things that you’ll need for the project.

  • 10 inches of (3/8 – ½ inch) Elastic
  • Pair of jeans
  • Fabric Scissors
  • Fabric clips/pins
  • Double fold bias tape (optional) approximately 2 yards
  • Sewing machine or needle and thread
  • Fray Check (optional)
bias tape diy

If you want to make your own bias tape that has prints or different colors, I have a tutorial showing you how to do that.

When you make your bias tape, you can use fun, colorful prints you’ll never see in a fabric store.

Garden Apron Instructions

1- Take your jeans and cut off the pant legs.

Cut straight across just below the crotch seam. ***** If your pants have a front pocket hanging lower than the cut, fold the pocket so you don’t cut it.

After cutting off one pant leg, fold the pants in half and use the cut leg as a template.

Don’t worry too much about straightening the edges; you’ll line that up later.

upcycled jeans garden apronDON’T THROW AWAY THE JEAN LEGS! Please put them in a tote with all your other jeans scraps for OTHER FUN PROJECTS.

2- Cut out a section of the front pants just below the waistband.

On that left side, take your scissors and cut across just below the waistband, not into the waistband, but over about two inches, and then cut straight down towards the edge of the pant leg.

3- On the zipper side, you’ll cut away the extra fabric around the zipper.

Take your scissors and cut around that area so it looks like this.

4- To square off the bottom of the apron

Fold the pants in half and cut a parallel line straight across, leaving the length as long as possible.

Make sure you don’t cut into the pocket. Fold it up out of the way while you make the cut.

5- Finishing the garden apron bottom:

Open up the apron at the center back seam. There tends to be a little triangle piece of fabric that may stick out; just cut that off.

I like to round the corners, especially using bias tape. You can also leave it square if you want.

recycled jeans garden apron

Cut a curved rounded edge on one corner, then fold it over and use that as a template to cut the other side.

6- Pinning the bias tape:

Place the apron wrong side, facing up. Open up the bias tape, and smooth it out.

Fold the top edge of the bias tape over about a half inch, and then apply the RIGHT SIDE of the bias tape with the fold just below the zipper tab and clip it in place. I LOVE THESE LITTLE FABRIC CLIPS.

You can use the clips or pins to apply the bias tape all the way around, or can just apply the tape and sew as you go.

Do not cut the bias tape to length quite yet. You’ll do that in just a minute to make sure that you get an accurate fit. (It’s not a good thing if you cut it and then find out you cut it short).

When you get to the other side, measure just below the waistband then ADD 3 inches in length just to be safe and give you some wiggle room.

garden apron bias tape sewing

7- GARDEN APRON Bias Tape Application

Using a straight stitch, go to the sewing machine, and sew the bias tape to the apron.

Bring the needle down just to the RIGHT of the crease in the bias tape. Don’t sew in the crease.

That’ll give you a little more playroom with your bias tape when you fold it around all the fabric. The beautiful thing about bias tape is it’ will curve and work well around the curved edges.

Backstitch and sew all the way around. TAKE YOUR TIME, especially around the corners, stopping and starting as you need.

And if you mess up, go ahead and use your seam ripper and undo that portion that didn’t work out too well and adjust and re-sew.

Bias tape is really fun to work with. It may seem a little intimidating, but it’s really fun once you get used to it.

Adding bias tape adds character to your projects, especially if you have some fun prints to work with.

garaden apron

When you start to get a little closer to the other end, you can leave your needle down and then cut the bias tape to the length that you need.

Fold it over again ½ inch, and then cut it off there, make sure that that fold is just below the waistband. Finish and back stitch.

8- Top Stitch Bias Tape

Flip it over and topstitch. Use a regular straight stitch. When top stitching, I increase the length of the stitch to a 3. It gives a better-looking topstitch.

Fold the folded edge of the bias tape over the previous stitching so it covers that, and sew along the edge., just inside the fold of the bias tape. (about 1/8 inch from the left side. Make sure to catch the edge.

Take your time around the corners, and then when you get to the other side, top stitch over that folded edge.

9- Garden Apron Pockets

Let me show you what to do with the pockets if they are too long.

Not all pockets are going to be this long. Take the pocket and see how much you need to cut off so it doesn’t hang lower than the bottom of the apron.

Take your scissors and cut a curve angling off to match the side of the pocket. Sew a regular straight seam using a ¼ inch seam allowance. It doesn’t have to be perfect.

Finish off the edge using a big zigzag stitch. This will keep the pocket from fraying.

Do that with both pockets.

10- Garden Apron Closure

Let me show you how to apply the elastic to the waistband.

I recommend trying on the apron and seeing how long you need to make the elastic.

Once you have the length, take the elastic, fold it in half, line up the edges of the elastic, and stick it through from the front to the back with the edges lined up.

Secure it in place and sew along the edges of the elastic using a big zigzag stitch. I like to go back and forth a few times to ensure it is secure.

So that’s all there is to it. Grab a pair of jeans, some elastic, your garden tools, and whatever else you need to shove in a pocket in the garden, and have fun sewing!

 

jan3

Share:

Facebook
Twitter
Pinterest

Connect:

Picture of Jan Howell

Jan Howell

Whether it’s a new recipe, a fun craft, or some handy tips for your garden and home, I hope to empower and inspire you with skills that you can use to create joy, improved health, and to do it in a simple way.

Read More

6 Important Things To Know Before Buying a Sewing Machine

buying a sewing machine

Do you love to sew, but you’re finding yourself getting frustrated with your current sewing machine?

Or maybe you’re a beginner looking to buy your first machine, whatever your situation, buying a sewing machine can be very overwhelming.

There are so many options out there. How do you know what to look for?

In this blog post, I will review six key factors to consider when buying a sewing machine.

I’ll be going over

  • Your intended use for the machine.
  • Some features that you’ll want to make sure that you have
  • How to get the best machine for your money
  • I’ll go over some brands that I recommend and things to look for
  • Whether or not to buy a used or a brand-new machine
  • Tips from my sewing machine mechanic

There may be some things you don’t know about sewing machines that you’ll want to read below.

1- What are you going to be using the sewing machine for?

The first thing to consider, obviously, is what you are going to be using the sewing machine for.

Are you a quilter? Are you someone who just wants to sew basic sewing projects, maybe a few clothing items, or maybe you’re into embroidery?

Knowing this firsthand will guide you to the correct machine because they all do many things.

If you want to sew on thicker fabrics or leather or bulky projects, you will want something that has a good motor that can handle those kinds of tasks and has a heavier motor.

sewing machine stitches

2- Sewing Machine Features

Let’s go over the features. When considering a new sewing machine, there are many options for features.

You must decide what features you want your machine to have.

Most machines will have the basic features and stitches, and you can do a lot with basic stitches!

over lock sewing machineI do have a tutorial that shows how to use certain presser feet and basic stitches to create an overlock stitch without a serger.

You’ll want to check that out.

So, with features, it just depends on how much you want to spend.

Some of these stitches and features make sewing more manageable, enjoyable, and worth the money.

There are two types of machines: mechanical and computerized machines.

A mechanical machine will have just knobs or manual buttons to push.

Computerized sewing machines will have a digital screen, and have multiple options and even software that you can download onto your machine.

Some sewing machines will have an automatic threader, needle threaders, automatic thread cutting, embroidery stitches, quilting stitches, stitch memory, and all kinds of other fancy things.

However, something to consider is, do you need all that stuff.

Here are some basic features that I recommend getting.

Most machines, even the basic sewing machines, are going to have most of these features.

  • zigzag stitch/lightning bolt stitch

  • buttonhole stitch
  • having a thread cutter is nice.
  • sewing machine needle threaderNeedle threader (even a basic mechanical machine will have a little lever that you can push down, or there are fancy ones on some computerized machines that you push a button and it automatically threads the needle on its own).

    This is nice for those of us who are getting older and find seeing that little hole a little challenging.

  • Needle position lever (Moving the needle to the left or right will come in handy when you want to sew closer or further away without having to adjust the seam allowance and for zipper application).
sewing machine presser feet

Your machine will come with the basic presser feet.

There are a lot of cool things that you can do with presser feet, and some of the feet that come with your machine, you may not even know what they’re for.

I have a tutorial showing the basic presser feet and what to use them for.

You can get all the details here.

large sewing machine

Another thing to consider is the size of the machine.

You can buy really small machines or machines that will take up a lot of room on your sewing table.

3- Budget

Now that you know some of the features you want, let’s discuss how much you want to spend.

Sewing machines can range from $199 up to thousands of dollars.

It’s all about what you want and what you can’t afford.

There was a time when I couldn’t afford a fancy machine, so I bought a used mechanical machine.

I still have that sewing machine, and years later, it is still running like a champ.

So if you can’t afford an expensive, fancy machine, just be patient and someday perhaps you will, if that is what you want.

(I’ll review some tips for buying used machines later in the post).

sewing machine dealership

The best thing to do is to try them out. Go to those stores, or use your sisters’ or some of your friends’ machines to test them out.

Go into a dealership, see the options, and listen to their recommendations. They’ll let you sew on the machines.

SEWING MACHINE TESTINGYou can sew on different fabrics and test different stitches.

There were times when I thought I wanted a particular machine, and I went in and test-drove it, but I really didn’t like it. It just didn’t feel right.

So get in there, test drive them, and see what feels good.

Most dealerships will have sales. They’ll even have floor models that they will sell at a discount.

Sometimes, they’ll offer bundles, maybe add a bunch of different presser feet or accessories.

SEWING MACHINE CLASSESWhen you buy a new machine at a dealership, they will most likely offer free classes to help you get acquainted with it.

SEWING MACHINE TYPES

4- Sewing Machine Brands

I’m not going to tell you what brand to buy.

All brands will have models with strengths and weaknesses, even within the same brand.

Different models may have different features.

It’s like buying a car, unfortunately.

Do your research and test drive them?

Some sewing machines will seem like a great deal and VERY low in price. (Like $99).

They’re often called “disposable sewing machines”.

I don’t know about you, but if you are thinking about buying a machine, I don’t think I want to buy a ” disposable ” machine.

DISPOSABLE SEWING MACHINE

However, if you just need a simple machine to teach your kids how to sew or if you sew here and there for projects like hemming pants, one of these machines would be okay.

This is something to consider as well. If you buy a $199 sewing machine and it starts sewing wonky or needs repair, you will most likely not be able to find parts, and if you can, the parts and labor would be more expensive than buying another one.

I do not recommend buying a sewing machine from a big box store such as Walmart or Costco.

I was told that some sewing machine companies will make sewing machines for the big box stores and they’ll label it with the same sewing machine name and the same model, but the components inside are not the same.

There are also sewing machine manufacturers that will make machines with the same innards, but they just put different COVERS ON THEM.

For example, one particular Brother sewing machine (MODEL NS80PRW) is the same thing as a Babylock Jubilant  (BL80B)

I had no idea that existed.

Sometimes, the Babylock will be more expensive in some dealerships, and sometimes, it won’t.

These two machines are reasonable and affordable.

The recommendations of brands that I’m going to share below are because I’ve had experience with them and used them.

  • Bernina
  • Babylock
  • Jenome
  • Viking/Husqvarna
  • Brother

I’m sure there are other great machines out there of which I’m unaware.

(SHARE YOUR RECOMMENDATIONS IN THE COMMENTS BELOW)

5- To Buy a Used or New Sewing Machine?

Let’s review some of the pros and cons of buying a used or new machine.

Both options can be great choices. It just depends are what you want and need.

USED SEWING MACHINES

Where to find used machines

Many sewing machine repair shops will carry previously owned and refurbished machines to buy, which is a good option.

Other places to look for used machines are Facebook Marketplace, your local classified ads, and by word of mouth.

There are a lot of good machines sitting in closets being unused.

Some people inherit machines and sell them at a reasonable price just because they want to get rid of them and have no idea what they are worth.

Some cautions to be aware of when buying a used sewing machine

When you buy from an individual, make sure to ask a lot of questions.

  • Does it have all the components?
  • Do they have the presser feet you want? (If not, you can buy individual feet online).

  • Do they have the manual? (And if they don’t have the manual, don’t get too freaked out about that because nowadays, you can usually Google or download any sewing machine model).

  • Ask if you can plug it in and test it.

Another benefit of buying used is that often, the owner has accumulated many more accessories and added them to the package.

sewing tips sergerNow, let’s talk a little about sergers. Sergers don’t last as long as sewing machines, so if you are considering buying a used serger, ask if they’ve used it a lot. If it’s ancient, this can be a little risky.

I would suggest buying a new serger if you can.

NEW SEWING MACHINES

If you have the money and a new machine is what you want, there are some benefits.

You’re going to get a warranty.

Classes. (Most sewing machine dealerships offer classes after you buy a new machine, which is nice because you can get some great tips on how to use the machine).

You know that straight out of the box, it’s going to work well.

SEWING MACHINE REPAIRMAN

6- Advice From A Sewing Machine Repairman

When researching what kind of sewing machine I wanted, I thought, who better to ask than someone who gets to work on all kinds of machines?

Surely, he has opinions on what is good and what is not.

SEWING MACHINE EXCHANGEI went into the shop that has been servicing my machine for many years and had a chat with Dave at Sewing Machine Exchange.

It was great that he shared some awesome tips on things to look for when buying a sewing machine with me.

He talked about brands, and we were on the same page about what made good machines and what did not.

Some of the things that he mentioned:

He recommends getting a mechanical machine if you want to spend less than $600 on a new machine.

Because when you spend less than $600 on a computerized machine, the quality will not be the best.

Mechanical machines are workhorses and are good machines.

But if you want a computerized machine with more bells and whistles, you’ll probably spend more than $600 on a new machine.

SEWING MACHINE SERVICE
Get your machine serviced every 2 years.

You may not think you need to have it serviced, especially if you haven’t been sewing on it much.

You still need to have it serviced.

He told me that leaving your sewing machine unused is probably the worst thing you can do to it.

Like an automobile, you don’t want to park it in the garage for years and then suddenly start using it again.

You’re going to have problems.

Sewing a lot on your machine will not wear it out; in fact, it will be better for it.

So, get out your machine and get sewing.

How to keep your sewing machine in top shape and last longer.
  • Keep your machine cleaned and oiled.

I was told when I bought my last machine NOT to oil it. There are machines that they recommend not oiling.

For those machines that require a little oil (your manual will tell you where and how if you are supposed to).

  • 3 in one oil sewing machineDO NOT USE 3 IN 1 OIL! Make sure you are using the correct type of oil for your machine. It will most likely come with a little vial of oil. 

oiling sewing machine The place that you’ll want to oil the machine is just in your bobbin case, whether it’s a top loading or a front loading right on the hook.

Look in your manual. (I’ll be doing a tutorial in the future on the details of cleaning and oiling your machine, so watch for that.)

Don’t go crazy and put a bunch of drops of oil in there. All it takes is ONE DROP!

If you see other holes on your machine that you think may be a place to put oil….DON’T!

do not oil sewing machineThe manual for one of my machines states NOT to oil the machine.

How often do you oil your machine?

He said every eight to 10 hours of sewing.

Keep your sewing machine free of lint and dust.

cleaning sewing machineGet out the little duster that comes with your machine, or you can use a little paintbrush.

Remove the bobbin case and the top plate. You’ll be surprised by all the little dust bunnies you’ll find in there!

Keep your sewing machine covered when you are not using it.

If your sewing machine does not have a cover, take a towel and put it over the top.

It will get dusty just like everything else in your house.

Whatever your scenario is, do the research and get out and test drive some sewing machines so you can get a feel of what you like and what you don’t like.

Another thing to know is that if you buy a machine and you’re not in love with it, you can always choose a different one and sell that machine.

I’ve never had a problem selling a sewing machine.

I love to sew.

Having a nice machine that functions well, even if it’s just a basic model, can make your sewing experience either enjoyable or frustrating.

I hope these tips and considerations help you choose and buy a sewing machine.

Please leave a comment if you have any great suggestions or questions.

jan3

Share:

Facebook
Twitter
Pinterest

Connect:

Picture of Jan Howell

Jan Howell

Whether it’s a new recipe, a fun craft, or some handy tips for your garden and home, I hope to empower and inspire you with skills that you can use to create joy, improved health, and to do it in a simple way.

Read More

How To Make a Microwave Potato Bag // Quick Sewing Project

potato bag

In this DIY sewing tutorial, I’m going to show you how you can make a microwaved baked potato bag. This is a super easy sewing project and these bags make the perfect baked potatoes.

You know those times when you want to cook a baked potato, but you don’t have an hour or an hour and a half to spare? No worries. I’ve got you covered. 

You can have a yummy, fluffy baked potato cooked in 4-8 minutes, depending on the amount or size of your potato.

This method of cooking, especially if you’re just cooking for one or two people, will save you so much time.

The bags also work well for sweet potatoes and even corn on the cob. I’ll go over the cooking instructions a little later in the tutorial. Let’s go over how to make the bag.

How To Make a Microwave Baked Potato Bag

I do have a detailed video tutorial that is loaded with tips. You can watch it at the end of the post.

potato bag materials

Potato Bag Materials and Items Needed

***VERY IMPORTANT: All the contents of the bag need to be 100% COTTON!

potato bag

Cutting Out Potato Bag

1- If using the pattern, assemble it first, which is very easy to do and will only take a few minutes. Or you can just use the grid on a rotary mat and a rotary cutter to cut out pieces.

2- Cut out 2 fabric pieces 22 x 11 inches, (outer piece and 1 lining).

Cut out 1 Wrap-N-Zap piece 22 x 11 inches

Sewing

3- Place the BATTING down. Then take the OUTER PIECE and place it on top of the batting with the RIGHT SIDE FACING UP.

4- Now place the LINING on top of the outer piece with RIGHT SIDE FACING DOWN

5- Pin or clip in place.

6- Using a 3/8 inch seam allowance, sew all the way around LEAVING ABOUT A 3 INCH OPENING (UNSEWN) AT THE BOTTOM OF THE RECTANGLE. Backstitch at the beginning and end of the seam.

potate bag clip

7- Clip the corners.

8- Turn  the potato bag RIGHT SIDE FACING OUT. Using a turning stick, poke the corners out.

9- Close the opening by folding the seam allowance under and clip in place.

10- Press out the edges.

11- Top stitch the short ends of the rectangle using a 1/8-inch seam allowance.

potatoe bag

12- Fold the bottom edge up 8 inches and clip in place.

potato bag

13- Flip the top edge down 3 ½ inches and clip in place.

potato bag topstitching

14- Top stitch down the sides using a 3/8 inch seam allowance. Backstitch at the beginning and end of the seam. *** Double-sew the overlapped area to strengthen the seam in this area.

Clip threads and you are all set!

How to use the potato bags

  • Wash and dry vegetables – do NOT poke holes in the potatoes.
  • Place items inside the bag, and put the bag in the microwave with the opening facing down.
    Select a cooking time & start

Potato Bag Microwave Cooking Times

These are approximate times, assuming the microwave is set to HIGH.

  • 2 Large Russet Potatoes: *8 minutes
  • 2 Medium Sweet Potatoes: *10 minutes
  • 3 Medium Bred Rolls: 20 seconds
  • 2 Large Corn Cobs: *6 minutes
  • Dinner Rolls/Biscuits: 15 seconds
  • Tortillas: 1 – 2 minutes

* Cook in 1-2 minute increments until the item is done

How to care for the potato bags

Dry the bags out after each use. The microwave potato bags are machine washable. Just don’t use fabric softener.

THESE BAGS MAKE GREAT GIFTS.

GET THE POTATO BAG PATTERN HERE

or in my 

ETSY SHOP

The PDF downloadable pattern also comes with a gift tag that has all the baking instructions on it. You can find that in my website store.

Play Video

Have fun sewing!

jan3

Share:

Facebook
Twitter
Pinterest

Connect:

Picture of Jan Howell

Jan Howell

Whether it’s a new recipe, a fun craft, or some handy tips for your garden and home, I hope to empower and inspire you with skills that you can use to create joy, improved health, and to do it in a simple way.

Read More

2 Easy Ways To Bind a Quilt Using the Backing Fabric

quilt bindting

 Making a quilt can seem a little intimidating, especially if you’re new to sewing, but it’s actually really quite simple. In this tutorial, I’m going to show you how to bind the quilt using the backing fabric.

There are 2 easy methods that I am going to show you: hand sewing and using the sewing machine. I’m also going to show you how to add a label or tag to your quilt if you want to.

Using the backing fabric is one of my favorite ways to bind a quilt. It’s really easy, and you can use this method for any quilt that you make. If you haven’t watched my other tutorials in the quilting series, you can find them here.

quilt binding materials & supplies

Materials & Items Needed

quilt binding material and supplies

Quilt Binding: Method One

Squaring Up the Quilt

One of the first things that you’ll want to do is to square up your quilt. Now, it doesn’t have to be perfect. There’s been a lot going on with the quilt up to this point. You’ve pieced several pieces of fabric together, tied or quilted the quilt, and so there could be a lot of shifting going on. The edges are not going to be even. No WORRIES.

 

1- GET RID OF EXCESS BATTING

The first thing you’re going to do is get rid of that excess batting. Take your scissors and cut the excess batting along all edges of the quilt, making sure that you’re not cutting that backing fabric.

Of course, the smaller the blanket, the easier this process will be. Place the quilt on a big table, and if you don’t have a big table, you can put the blanket on the floor.

2- MARKING AND CUTTING THE QUILT TOP

The binding needs to be cut so it measures at least one inch. You may need to cut some off the backing or cut some of the quilt top down, so you have a straight line and that one-inch border.

Grab your rotary cutter ruler and or measuring tape. Take the chalk pen and mark it on the quilt top or the backing fabric where you need to cut. It helps to use the cutting ruler to get a straight edge.

Remember it doesn’t have to be perfect. Do this on all sides of the quilt.

*** Before you do any cutting, you’ll want to pull the backing fabric under so you don’t accidentally cut it. To do this, take the safety pins and pin the backing fabric so it’s out of the way. Pin and trim one side of the backing fabric at a time.

I love using these BIG QUILTING SAFETY PINS. However, you can use regular safety pins if you want. Using the ruler, line up the chalk-marking sand and cut off the excess fabric where needed. This is where the ruler and the rotary cutter comes in handy. Repeat this process on all sides of the quilt

After you have squared up the quilt and left a one-inch boarder, It’s time to pin everything in place.

binding backing

3- FOLDING AND PINNING THE BINDING IN PLACE

clipping the bindingGrab a bunch of sewing clips or pins and start in one of the corners of the quilt. Fold the cut edge of the binding to the edge of the top piece and then fold it again. Clip in place.

Let me show you how to make mitered corners. Take the extended rolled binding in the corner and fold it so it makes a little triangle and the folded edge is along the edge of the top piece as shown in the photo above.

quilt binding cornersNow fold the binding just like you did, and it will make a mitered corner. You’ll come back a little later to hand-sew those corners in place. Clip in place.

There are two ways that you can sew this. You can use a needle and thread, or you can use the sewing machine.

quilt binding

4- SEWING THE BINDING: Needle & Thread Method

The first method of sewing on the binding, I’m going to show you with a needle in the thread. This is one of my favorite ways to bind a quilt.

I find it quite relaxing and enjoyable, even though it takes a little longer. You can place the quilt on your lap, turn on a good movie or podcast and relax.

You can clip the whole quilt or you can clip about 5 clips at a time and work your way around the quilt.

sewing binding

Single-thread your needle with matching thread and knot the end with quilters not. (watch the video HERE for instructions). Start sewing anywhere on the quilt. You’ll be using basically the BLIND HEM STITCH.

quitl binding finished

Once you sew up to the last clip, you can fold and clip the next 5 clips. Continue this process until you’ve sewn all the way around the quilt.

Insert the needle into the fold of the binding from the back of the binding to the front. Hide the thread knot underneath.

Take a little stitch right at the side of the binding, through all layers. Insert the needle into the fold of the binding and directly across from where you came out on the last stitch.

Then go back into the quilt, and take another little stitch, then go back into the binding. Repeat this process until you run out of thread. Simply re-thread the needle and continue until you’ve sewn all the way around the quilt. Using the same type of stitch, so the mitered corners together. (Watch video to see the process).

sewing machine quilt binding

5- SEWING THE BINDING: Sewing Machine Method

Thread your machine and load your bobbin using a matching thread. Set your machine to a strait stitch. Length 2.5. You will be top stitching 1/8 inch from the inner fold of the binding using. You can adjust the needle to the left so you can use the edge of the presser foot as a guide or place a piece of masking tape for a guide.

More important is to keep the stitch at that 1/8 inch mark. Take your time. Before you start sewing. Bring the needle down by turning the hand wheel of your sewing machine toward you so you can sew exactly where the needle is on your binding. Make adjustments as needed.

5- SEWING THE BINDING: Sewing Machine Method

Thread your machine and load your bobbin using a matching thread. Set your machine to a strait stitch. Length 2.5. You will be top stitching 1/8 inch from the inner fold of the binding using. You can adjust the needle to the left so you can use the edge of the presser foot as a guide or place a piece of masking tape for a guide.

More important is to keep the stitch at that 1/8 inch mark. Take your time. Before you start sewing. Bring the needle down by turning the hand wheel of your sewing machine toward you so you can sew exactly where the needle is on your binding. Make adjustments as needed.

And you can take your, you can take your hand wheel and turn it toward you so you can see where that needle is going to come down. And I might need to go to the right just a little bit.

tip

It helps to place your machine on the right side of the table so you have something to support your quilt while you sew. If you don’t have a big table, you may want to get a chair or something else to support the quilt.

To keep the thread underneath from leaving a thread nest, hold onto the bobbin thread for the first couple of stitches and then let it go. This works like a charm. Who wants those bunched-up threads on the back side of your quilt? Not me.

I like folding and clipping a short portion as I go, or you can clip the whole quilt before you sew. Keep a little cup or your pin cushion close by to put your clips in as you remove them from your quilt.

Fold the corners as shown in method one. When you come to a corner, leave the needle down, lift up the presser foot and pivot the quilt and continue to sew. You will come back and hand-sew the mitered corners in place as shown above.

quilt label

6- ADDING A LABEL OR TAG ( optional)

binding tagIf I’m making a quilt as a gift, I always put a little heart or something on the backside.

I have available some fun editable PDF labels that you can download, edit and print. Editable files, and several sheets of love labels.

quilt bindtingThis is a tag that I made and printed onto this ribbon. LEARN HOW TO MAKE YOUR LABELS HERE.

I hope you can see that making a quilt is not that big of a deal. If you’ve never made a quilt before or if you have never sewn before, this is a good little project. You can start out with a small blanket and then work your way up to something bigger.

Have fun sewing!

OTHER TUTORIALS YOU MAY BE INTERESTED IN

HOW TO MAKE A DENIM PATCHWORK QUILT

Upcycled Denim Jeans – Ideas and Tips

My Top 10 Sewing Tips for Beginners | Know Before You Sew

Have fun sewing!

jan3

Share:

Facebook
Twitter
Pinterest

Connect:

Picture of Jan Howell

Jan Howell

Whether it’s a new recipe, a fun craft, or some handy tips for your garden and home, I hope to empower and inspire you with skills that you can use to create joy, improved health, and to do it in a simple way.

Read More

How To Sew a Knit Cuff to Pants and Sleeves the Easy Way

cuff

Adding a knit cuff to a pair of pants or sleeves is a very easy thing to do. You can transform a normal pair of pants or pajamas into a pair of jogger pants, and you can add a soft cuff to any sleeve.

This is a good thing to know how to do because once you know how to sew on a cuff, you’re ready to make a lot of other things with knit fabric: shirts, sweatshirts, baby clothes, and more.

knit cuff

What kind of fabric do you use to make a cuff?

You’ll need some knit ribbing. Knit ribbing can be purchased at the fabric store by the yard, or online. (This site has a great variety of colors and is quite reasonably priced).

upcycled cuffAnother great option, and something I do all the time, is to use upcycled cuffs from other items of clothing. Whenever I have a piece of clothing I no longer want, I check it for good buttons, zipper pulls, AND fabric (cuffs).

You can also use recycled knit clothing that has a lot of stretch to it. The fabric will need to have at least 30% stretch to it for it to work as a cuff.

I do it all the time, and you can get some really cute and unique results. Knit leggings fabric works well. You can usually tell what fabrics will work well for a cuff.

Ribbing will come in different weights and fabric content. Some will stretch more than others. Ribbing with a lot of cotton content will not stretch as much. Use your best judgment when choosing knit ribbing for your particular project.

I’m going to show you how to add a cuff to a pair of pants and sleeves. The pants and shirts can be made of knit fabric AND woven fabrics.

Materials & Items Needed

cuff pants

How to Add a Cuff To a Pair of Pants

If the pants need to be shorter, decide the length you want them to be and cut them off. If the pants are the right length, cut off the hem. (Don’t worry, they won’t be too short because you’re adding a few inches of ribbing).

1- Measure the leg opening

Once you have the length figured out, measure the width of the leg opening. If it is wider than 8 inches (adult) or 6 inches (children) then you’ll need to take in the legs. This is easy to do.

Using a writing device mark the desired seam allowance at the bottom of the pants. You may only need to take it in on one side or you may need to even it out and take a little off each side. Start half-way up the leg seam and gradually taper to the point you marked. You can use a sewing machine or serger.

If you have a serger, use it. It will save you time because you won’t have to finish the seams. Once you have the width you want, measure to see how wide it is.

2- Cutting out the cuff

The cuff measurement needs to be about 2 ½ inches less than the width of the leg opening. (Don’t measure the circumference of the leg opening, measure the width of it as it is laying flat, and the fabric doubled). I hope that makes sense.

Subtract that 2 ½ inches from that measurement and that will be how wide you need to make the cuff. (fabric doubled). The height of the cuff is up to you.

Average cuff height (the finished cuff will be folded in half)

Adult: 6-8 inches

Child: 4 inches

Cut two out on the fold.

3- Sewing the cuff

Fold the cuff in half with the RIGHT SIDES FACING TOGETHER.

Sew down the long side.

Fold the sewn cuff in half with WRONG SIDES FACING TOGETHER.

Mark the half-way point with a pin.

4- Cuff Application

If the pants only have one seam, find the halfway point of the leg opening and mark it with a pin.

With the RIGHT SIDE of the pants facing out, place the cuff over the top and around the leg. Align the half-way points and pin in place.

Take it to the sewing machine/serger and starting at the seam, sew all the way around using a 3/8” seam allowance.

Start sewing, adjust the edges and then start sewing again, stretching the cuff as you sew. Backstitch at the beginning and end of the seam.

If you used a regular sewing machine you’ll need to finish off the seam allowance with a zigzag stitch. (width 4, length 3).

Do these same steps on the other pant leg.

sleeve cuff

How to Add a Cuff To a Sleeve

If a knit shirt has been hemmed, most likely the opening is not really wide so you won’t have to take any off the width.

1- Measuring the Cuff Width

Measure the armhole (fabric doubled) and subtract ½ inch. That will be the width measurement (fabric doubled).

Average Sleeve Cuff Height

Adult: 5 inches

Child: 4 inches

Of course, you can make the cuffs as long as you want.

2- Cutting out sleeve cuff

Cut 2 of the cuffs out of the ribbing fabric and place RIGHT SIDES TOGETHER, with the stretch of the fabric laying horizontally.

3- Sew down the side.

Turn the right side facing out and mark the halfway points with a pin.

4- Cut off the sleeve hem.

Mark the half-way point with a pin.

 

cuff application

5- Sleeve cuff application

With the right side of the sleeve facing out, place the cuff over the top and around the sleeve. Match up halfway points and pin them in place.

 

finished edge cuff

Take it to the sewing machine and proceed sewing around just as you did with the pants. Take your time! You’re sewing through three layers of fabric and you’re sewing in a very small space. Start sewing, adjust the edges and then start sewing again, stretching the cuff as you sew.

Finish seam with zigzag stitch if needed.

That’s it! Pretty simple, right?

 

jan3

Share:

Facebook
Twitter
Pinterest

Connect:

Picture of Jan Howell

Jan Howell

Whether it’s a new recipe, a fun craft, or some handy tips for your garden and home, I hope to empower and inspire you with skills that you can use to create joy, improved health, and to do it in a simple way.

Read More

How To Make a Gift Card Holder // Simple Sewing Project

fabric gift card holder

(Revised 1-22-2025)

When you give a gift card as a gift, why not make a unique, homemade gift card holder to put it in? They only take 10 minutes to make and it’s a project in that you can use up some of your fabric scraps.

gift card holder
gift card holder

These gift card holders are fun and simple to make and great for “last minute” gift giving. This is a good beginner sewing project.

They only take a minimal amount of fabric (two 5 x 7-inch pieces) and a few snaps. Adding some lightweight interfacing, you can make the gift cards a little more rigid, but this is optional.

fabric gift card holder items

GIFT CARD HOLDER MATERIALS & ITEMS NEEDED

GIFT CARD HOLDER CUTTING OUT

GIFT CARD HOLDER INSTRUCTIONS

1 – Using the free pattern, cut out 2. (1 lining/1 outer)

You can have them be different prints or the same.

2 – Cut out 1 interfacing (optional).

CUT IT ¼ INCH SMALLER

3 – Apply the interfacing to the WRONG SIDE of just one of the fabric pieces.

(bumpy side of interfacing down).

4 – Place the two pieces RIGHT SIDES TOGETHER.

5 – If you are adding a tag or label, do that now.

Using the pattern, apply the tag where suggested. This is totally optional. It helps to baste the tag in place before sewing the outer seam.

*** If you want to learn how to make your own labels, check out my tutorial HERE.

gift card holder ties

6- How to add a tie to the gift card holder.

Measure 11 inches on the ribbon and fold the ribbon at that point.

Place the folded ribbon onto the fabric at the top center point.

Allow the ribbon to extend past the fabric about 1/4 inch.

Tack in place or clip in place with it sancwhiced between the front and back pieces of fabric. Proceed with the next step.

7 – Using a ¼ inch SEAM ALLOWANCE, start sewing at the indicated point, continue sewing around, and stop LEAVING A 1 ½ – 2 INCH OPENING.

Back stitching at the beginning and end of the seam.

8 – Clip corners and notch the curved edge.

9 – Turn RIGHT SIDES FACING OUT

Push out the corners with a “turning stick” or something with a blunt end.

10 – Tuck in the seam allowance from the opening you left.

Press all the edges well.

11 – Fold the bottom edge up 1 3/4 inches, and press.

Fold the top edge down so the height of the envelope is 2 ¼ inches. Press to make a crease.

gift card holder

12- Pin or clip the bottom section of the gift card holder in place and sew along one side, over the top, and down the other side using a top-stitch 1/8 inch from the edge.

Clip threads.

gift card holder turning

Gift Card Holder Snap Application

13- Poke Holes

Using the awl that comes with the kit, poke a hole in the top flap where indicated and mark the hole with a pencil where the second snap needs to be applied.

gift card holder snap 1

14 – Top Snap

Take one of the thumbtack-looking components and stick it through the hole you made at the top of the holder. (push through from outer fabric to inner)

15- Apply a female component.

Hold in place while you squeeze the two pieces together using the snap pliers.

16 – Repeat for the other snap.

Do the same thing with the other snap, but poke the thumbtack piece through the hole from the outer fabric to the inner. Use the male snap piece this time.

17 – Repeat for the other snap.

Do the same thing with the other snap but poke the thumbtack piece through the hole from the outer fabric to the inner. Use the male snap piece this time.

18 – Tad-ah, that’s it! 

 

 

jan3

Share:

Facebook
Twitter
Pinterest

Connect:

Picture of Jan Howell

Jan Howell

Whether it’s a new recipe, a fun craft, or some handy tips for your garden and home, I hope to empower and inspire you with skills that you can use to create joy, improved health, and to do it in a simple way.

Read More

How To Make A Pillowcase With A Cuff // Easy Burrito Method

gift ideas PILLOWCASE BURRITO

Making a pillowcase is a fun and simple beginner sewing project, and in this tutorial, I will show you how to add a contrasting cuff using the burrito method. It only requires a yard of fabric and about 15 minutes to make.

I’ll show you how to make them using a sewing machine, and a serger, and how to sew a French seam if you choose. You can also add a small strip of trim if you want and I’ll show you how easy it is to do that.

I have a FREE printable PDF guide showing the fabric measurements for a STANDARD, QUEEN, AND KING-size pillowcase. A standard pillowcase only requires one yard of fabric.

GET THE PDF HERE

Child’s Travel Pillowcase Measurements

These measurements are for creating a pillowcase that fits a standard child-size travel pillow. (typically around 12″ x 16″ / 30.5 cm x 40.5 cm).

Use these fabric cuts if you’re making a burrito-style pillowcase:

  • Main Body: 27″ x 17″ (68.5 cm x 43 cm)
  • Cuff: 9″ x 17″ (23 cm x 43 cm)
  • Accent Strip (optional): 2″ x 17″ (5 cm x 43 cm)


These measurements allow for standard seam allowances and create a snug fit for the travel pillow.
Tip: Add 1-2″ to the width and/or length if a looser fit is preferred.

PILLOWCASE MATERIALS & ITEMS NEEDED

  • Fabric (flannel or quilters cotton)
  • Sewing machine (serger optional)
  • Sewing machine needle size (Universal 90/14)
  • Scissors (Rotary Cutter & Mat optional)
  • Pins/Wonder fabric clips
  • Seam gauge/ measuring tape
  • Iron/Ironing board
  • Label/Tag (optional)

Standard Pillowcase Instructions

When you buy cotton and flannel fabric from the store, the width that it comes on the bolt varies from 43-44 inches. The first measurement on the cutting guide shows 44 inches x whatever. That is the width (cut edge) of the fabric, not the selvage edge. So it may be 43-44 inches.

Don’t worry about that because I’m going to simplify the process by cutting off the excess in one of the steps that will save you some time. So just cut those pieces out as indicated in the photo.

TIP: Before cutting the pillowcase pieces, make sure you are starting out with a STRAIGHT EDGE. The video tutorial gives some good tips on how to do this and why it is important!

*****If you’re using a directional print fabric (images are facing one direction), you’ll need to cut it out differently. Check out the video tutorial on how to do that.

PILLOWCASE BURRITO FABRIC PIECES

CUTTING OUT PILLOWCASE FABRIC PIECES

  • Main Fabric – cut 1 piece 44 x 28 inches / 111.5 x 71 cm
  • Cuff Fabric – cut 1 piece 44 x 9 inches / 111.5 x 23 cm
  • Narrow Trim (optional) – cut 1 piece 44 x 2 inches / 111.5 x 5 cm
pillowcase burrito

FABRIC PREP

1- If you are applying the trim, fold the trim piece in half horizontally with Wrong Sides Together (WST) and press to form a crease. Set that aside.

PILLOWCASE FABRIC LAYERS2- Place the CUFF PIECE right side facing up.

3- Take the pillowcase MAIN PIECE and place it on top of the CUFF PIECE RIGHT right side facing up. Line up the edges. **Don’t worry if the side edges don’t line up. We’ll trim those off so they’re even in just a bit.

4- If you are applying trim, add that to the pile with the RAW EDGES lined up with the edges of the cuff and main piece. Pin or clip in place.

PILLOWCASE JELLYROLL

5- Take the top edge of the MAIN PIECE, and start making a little jellyroll towards the cuff.

6- Continue to roll until it is in the middle of the cuff.

PILLOWCASE JELLYROLL PINNING7- Fold the other edge of the cuff over the jellyroll and line up that edge with the others.

8- Pin or clip all those edges together using pins or clips.

PILLOWCASE CUFF SEAM

SEWING THE PILLOWCASE CUFF

1- Take the roll to the sewing machine or serger and sew along the pinned edge using a 1/2” seam allowance.

PILLOWCASE JELLYROLL2- THIS IS WHERE THE MAGIC HAPPENS! Grab a piece of the jellyroll from one of the ends and start pulling it out and continue until all the innards are pulled out.

3- Unroll the fabric and wallah, you have a beautiful ENCLOSED SEAM.

4- Flatten the fabric out and press the cuff so the seams are pulled out completely.

PILLOWCASE TRIMMING

5- Fold the pillowcase in half with the WRONG SIDE FACING OUT (sewing machine & serger method or RIGHT SIDE FACING OUT (burrito method).

Line up cuff, trim, and fabric edges.

Measure 20.5 inches from the fold for the regular seam method and 21 inches from the fold. Cut off all the excess fabric.

PILLOWCASE SEAMS

There are three different methods to finish the seams on this pillowcase.

  • Sewing machine
  • Serger
  • French seams
PILLOWCASE SEAM

Sewing Machine Method

1- Sew along the side and top of the pillowcase using a ½ inch seam allowance. Clip the corners.

2- Finish off the seam by sewing a simple zigzag stitch along the edges so it will not fray. There are other stitches you can use to finish the seams. WATCH THE TUTORIAL HERE.

ZIGZAG STITCH SETTING AT 4 wide, 3 length.

3- Turn the right side facing out and give it a good pressing.

PILLOWCASE SEAM SERGER

Serger Method

1- Simply sew along the edge using a ½ inch seam allowance. ***For some helpful tips on how to start and end serged seams watch the video tutorial.

2- Turn right side facing out and press.

PILLOWCASE FRENCH SEAM

PILLOWCASE FRENCH SEAM INSTRUCTIONS

1- With the right side of the fabric facing out, you are going to make the first seam using a ¼ inch SEAM ALLOWANCE. I know this may seem wrong, but trust me.

PILLOWCASE TRIMMake sure the cuff edges and trim are lined up.

PILLOWCASE TAG

How To Add A Tag or Label To The Pillowcase

If you want to add a tag or label, this is the time to do it. If not, skip to the next step.

Locate where you want to add the tag and baste it in place with the sewing machine 1/4 inch from the edge. Place the tag so the folded edge of the tag is outside the pillowcase edge as shown in the picture. **Make sure you allow space for the seam. The tag needs to stick out after sewing both seams. So find where the ¼ seam would be then account for the next 3/8 inch seam and see how the tag will be exposed and adjust accordingly. (I hope that makes sense). The video tutorial will show how it is done.

2- After sewing the first pass with the ¼ inch seam. Cut any strings stray threads from the cut edge. Turn the pillowcase WRONG SIDE FACING OUT and press out the edges.

3- Now take it back to the sewing machine and sew another pass USING A 3/8 INCH SEAM ALLOWANCE.

PILLOWCASE PRESSING4- Turn the pillowcase RIGHT SIDE FACING OUT and give it a final pressing.

Tadah! Now wasn’t that simple. Look at the tidy, professional French seam.

diy pillowcase

These pillowcase burritos make such fun gifts! Grab a yard of fabric and have fun sewing!

Have fun making PILLOWCASES!

jan3

Share:

Facebook
Twitter
Pinterest

Connect:

Picture of Jan Howell

Jan Howell

Whether it’s a new recipe, a fun craft, or some handy tips for your garden and home, I hope to empower and inspire you with skills that you can use to create joy, improved health, and to do it in a simple way.

Read More

Sewing With Fleece the Easy Way | My Top 10 Tips

sewing with fleece

Sewing with fleece can be a lot of fun and there are so many things you can make with it, however, there are a few things that you might want to know that will make your sewing experience with fleece a little easier.

In this blog post, I’m going to go over my top 10 tips for sewing and working with this stretchy, and cozy fabric.

SEWING WITH FLEECE: Tip #1- How to tell the right side of the fabric

The first tip that we’re going to go over is how to tell the difference between the right and the wrong side of the fabric. Sometimes this is pretty obvious. For example, when you look at printed fleece, the underside may be less vibrant but still can be kind of hard to tell.

With solid-color fleece pieces, it can be really tricky. When you’re sewing up a project and trying to put the right sides together, you’ll want to know which is the “right” side.

sewing with fleece selvage edge

Let me show you a SIMPLE HACK. Find the SELVAGE EDGE OF THE FABRIC. This is the edge of the fabric that has the manufactured finished edge. It looks like the photo above.

sewing with fleece stretchIf you take the non-selvage, the stretchy edge, and pull it, it will curl to the WRONG SIDE.

sewing with fleece non fray

SEWING WITH FLEECE: Tip #2- Fleece fabric does not fray

The second tip and what I love about sewing with fleece is that the fabric does not fray. That means that you don’t have to finish the seam edges on your projects and it’s quite nice.

SEWING WITH FLEECE: Tip #3- Use the correct needle and thread

When you sew on fleece fabric, you want to make sure that you’re using the correct needle and the correct size. You can get away with using a universal needle and honestly that’s what I use most, but you can also use a jersey needle or other ballpoint-type needles. This will keep the needle from putting holes in your fabric.

If you want more tips on needle sizes and needle types, you can download my FREE PRINTABLE SEWING MACHINE NEEDLE GUIDE, which shows you all the needle characteristics and how to use them.

Get the printable here.

I do recommend using a POLYESTER THREAD.

SEWING WITH FLEECE: Tip #4- Nap

Fleece fabric does have a nap to it. The nap means the direction that the fluff or fibers of the fabric all go the same way. Corduroy fabric is a good example and is a little more obvious, but fleece also has this.

If I were to cut out a bunch of pieces and not worry about the nap, and they were going in different directions, your finished project is going to look funky and weird and it might even look like it’s a different color.

I’m going to show you on this piece of fleece and these pieces for a slipper pattern. Notice how the front of the sole piece and the front of the top slipper piece are facing the same direction on the fabric. You don’t want to flip the pattern so that the top goes in the opposite direction.

You may be tempted to save fabric, especially on pieces like this, to flip that pattern over and have it face a different direction, to save fabric. DON’T DO IT! If I have to cut out multiples of the same piece, you can flip horizontally, but not vertically. (I hope that makes sense).

SEWING WITH FLEECE: Tip #5- Sewing machine settings

Stitch Settings: Using the correct sewing machine settings and stitching settings when you’re sewing with fleece fabric will make a big difference.

If you’re sewing an item that’s not going to get stretched, you can get away with using just a regular straight stitch, but you’ll want to adjust the stitch to be a little longer, say 3.5 to 4.

However, if you’re sewing a project that will be stretched at all, you will want to sew using a LIGHTNING BOLT STITCH or if your machine doesn’t have that lightning bolt stitch, just use a REGULAR ZIGZAG STITCH. Adjust the width to 1.5 so it’s a very narrow zigzag stitch. Set the length to be 1.5 or even shorter.

I do recommend testing out your stitches on a scrap piece of fabric before you start sewing your projects. Make sure that you’re using that zigzag or lightning bolt stitch on anything that’s going to stretch on your project because if you don’t when it is stretched the seam will pop and break, and you don’t want a hole in your seam.

sewing tips serger

If you have a serger, by all means, use it on your fleece projects. It makes the job so much faster and gives you some stretch to your seams and gives you a nice finished edge.

Another thing that you can do and I do recommend, is lowering the presser foot tension if your machine has that adjustment option.

SEWING WITH FLEECE: Tip #6- Use long pins

Use long pins and use lots of them, especially when you’re sewing around curves or over lots of layers of fabric. If you use little short pins they sometimes can get lost in the fluff of the fleece fabric.

For blankets or items made for children, you don’t want those little pins to get hidden in the fluff.

I really like these long flower pins.

SEWING WITH FLEECE: Tip #7- Sewing over bulky seams

When you’re working with fleece and several layers of fabric, it can get kind of bulky and things are going to shift. Here are a few tips for making this a little easier. (Watch the video for examples).

sewing with fleece hump jumperHave you ever seen this little Gadget? Most likely it came with your sewing machine. I have to be honest, it wasn’t until a couple of years ago that I even knew what this was strange item was.

It really is the coolest little device and it’s called a HUMP JUMPER. It levels off the presser foot when you sew over thick seams. It makes it so you don’t get those skipped stitches, and allows your sewing machine to ease over those bulky seams. They work really well when hemming jeans!

sewing with fleece diy hump jumperIf you don’t have one in your sewing kit, no worries. You can make one by folding a cereal box 3-4 times to make a rectangle as shown in the photo.

sewing with fleece bulky seamSlide it under the back of the presser foot just like you would the hump jumper. (Watch video tutorial for a demonstration).

sewing with fleece finger press

SEWING WITH FLEECE: Tip #8- No pressing

Fleece does not need to be pressed. If you need to open up a seam or something, just finger press it.

sewing with fleece cleaning

SEWING WITH FLEECE: Tip #9- Clean your machine

When you sew with fleece, you are going to have a lot of lint. Even when you’re cutting things out and especially inside your machines.

It’s important that you keep your machines clean. Take the brush that comes with your sewing supplies (or you can use a small paint brush) and brush out around the serger blade, the bobbin case and anywhere else you see lint.

Sewing machine repairman don’t advise blowing it with canned air or air compressors, which can lodge the lint even deeper into your machine.

It is a good idea to have your machine serviced and cleaned once in a while because lint does build up especially using fleece and upcycled sweaters.

sewing with fleece binding

SEWING WITH FLEECE: Tip #10- Use fleece for binding

I wanted to show you some ideas and tips on how to use fleece strips as binding. This binding can be used on so many projects.

Some examples are shown in the photo above with the BOWLING SLIPPERS, and PILOT & PIXIE CAPS.

sewing with fleece fleece bindingThis binding is so cozy, it stretches really nice, and it has a clean finished look. I SHOW THE TECHNIQUE IN THIS TUTORIAL.

Here are some fun projects you can make with fleece. 

Pixie & Pilot Caps

PIXY AND PILOT CAP

diy fleece neck warmer

Headband/Neck Warmer/Fingerless Mittens

Fleece Animal Beanies

 

I hope this information was helpful and makes your sewing with fleece a little easier.

I do have a new fleece pattern coming out soon, so make sure you are subscribed to my newsletter, so that you can be notified when new goodies and information are come out.

sewing with fleeceGet in your sewing room, get out your fleece and make something fun.

Share:

Facebook
Twitter
Pinterest

Connect:

Picture of Jan Howell

Jan Howell

Whether it’s a new recipe, a fun craft, or some handy tips for your garden and home, I hope to empower and inspire you with skills that you can use to create joy, improved health, and to do it in a simple way.

Read More

My Top 10 Sewing Tips for Beginners | Know Before You Sew

sewing tips

If you’re new to sewing or if you want to learn some awesome sewing tips, you’re in the right place. In this post, I’m going to share with you my top 10 sewing tips. Even if you don’t plan on being a professional seamstress, knowing how to sew is a GOOD THING!

These tips are not listed in any order of importance, so make sure you check out the whole thing! You can also watch the video tutorial at the end of the post.

I’ve been sewing for a long time (since junior high school) and have used these sewing skills a ton throughout my life. Not only did these sewing skills come in handy to help put me through college working in sewing factories, but I was also able to make a little money while working from home when my kiddos were little.

I used to sew dance and drill team uniforms while they were at school, and now I am able to share my passions teaching others to sew.

top 10 sewing tips

Over the years I’ve learned a few things and am excited to share with you my top 10 sewing tips. Of course, I have several other tips, (and I hope you’ve been able to catch them in my video tutorials and blog posts over time).

For this particular post, I’m going to focus on the ones I find most important. So without any further ado, let’s get into those sewing tips.

sewing tips machine

Sewing Tips #1 – You Don’t Need A Fancy Sewing Machine

You don’t need to buy a fancy and expensive sewing machine, especially if you are new to sewing. I went a LONG time without needing a sewing machine that had all the bells and whistles.

Let me tell you, there are some expensive sewing machines out there and all you need is a good solid machine with the basic stitches. I recommend looking into buying a USED MACHINE.

Check your local online local classified ads and the Facebook marketplace. Sewing machine repair shops will often have used machines that have been refurbished for sale.

sewing tips sergerAs you continue to sew, you can always upgrade to a different machine and even buy an overlock/serger machine, (which I do recommend you get if you can).

I’ve had many many different types and brands of machines over the years, and I have my favorites. I’ll go over some sewing tips in the near future on how to pick out the right machine for your specific needs.

Sewing TipS #2 – Become Familiar with Your Machine

Your sewing machine will come with a manual, READ IT! If you buy a used machine and it didn’t come with a manual, you can get online and find a copy of the model and make of your machine. You can also get on YouTube and find some great tutorials showing you specific things regarding your machine.

The owner’s manuals will show the parts, how to care for and how to use all the functions of the machine. It’s amazing the things I have learned when I have taken the time to actually read through this information.

I know, that when you get a machine, you are eager just to dive in and start sewing. Take the time to become familiar with it and you’ll save time in the long run.

presser feet youmakeitsimple.com

Another sewing tip I want to mention about your machine is that it will come with several different presser feet. I encourage you to get familiar with them and learn how to use them. 

I have a post and video tutorial showing you what the basic feet are and how to use them. 

Sewing Tips #3 – Get the Basic Sewing Supplies

When starting to sew, it’s nice to have all the BASIC sewing supplies. This isn’t going to cost you a lot of money and it will save you from being caught off-guard without an item that would really make the task a lot easier.

I have a video tutorial where I share with you a buyer’s guide and my loved recommendations.

YOU CAN WATCH THE VIDEO HERE

Here are some of those items I go over.

Sewing Tips #4 – Learn To Use A Rotary Cutter & Mat

Of course, this is optional, but I find this little tool saves a lot of time AND gives you really good results, especially when cutting straight lines. A rotary cutter doesn’t cost a lot of money and there are so many options out there.

I have a blog post and video tutorial giving you all the details on how to use them, what kind of mats and cutters are best, how to care for them, and some valuable safety tips. You can read the post and watch the video tutorial HERE.

Sewing Tips #5 – Take Care of Your Sewing Machine

Your sewing machine needs to be taken care of just like any other machine. It needs to be cleaned, covered, and occasionally tuned up. Even the best-made sewing machines will need to have a good service once in a while.

I recommend taking your machine into a sewing machine repair shop occasionally to have it serviced, especially if you’re having issues with your stitch! I do have a tutorial showing Common Sewing Machine Problems and how to troubleshoot the issue.

sewing tips threading

Most of the time, you can fix the issue with some of these simple things (Like re-threading your machine).

The sewing machine mechanic can give it a good cleaning. (You’d be amazed at how much lint and gunk can get into crevices that you can’t get to). It’s worth the money and will keep your machine running smoothly and make it last longer!

Your handbook will give instructions on how to maintain and clean your machine. With newer machines, they usually don’t recommend oiling anymore. Just check your manual.

sewing tips SEWING MACHINE NEEDLES

Sewing Tips #6 – Use The Correct Type of Needle

Most of the time you can get away with using a universal sewing machine needle if you’re sewing on cotton, cotton blends, or some kinds of synthetic fabric. Using the wrong type of needle can put holes in your material and give you a poor stitch.

For example: if you use a regular needle on a KNIT FABRIC, you will put holes in the fabric. If you use a thin needle on denim, you’ll most likely break the needle.

sewing with fleece needle guide

I have a blog post giving all these details AND I offer a free printable PDF that you can download that has a chart showing needle types, size, and what to use them on. YOU CAN GET IT HERE.

Another sewing machine needle tip I have is to use a needle sorter. If you’re like me, I put a needle in my machine and then I FORGET what type and size needle is in there.

There’s no way my eyes can read that tiny print on the needle telling what size it is. That is where this nifty little PIN CUSHION comes in handy. You can learn more about it here, and get the PDF iron-on printable to make your own.

Sewing Tips #7 – Keep Fabric Scraps Handy For Testing

I like to keep small scraps of fabric handy by my sewing machine for testing out new stitches and colors of thread. This allows me to test out the stitch length, width, and color of the thread.

You can also test buttonholes, and decorative stitches before sewing on your final project. It’s much better to make mistakes on a scrap of fabric than on valuable fabric that you’ve cut out and prepared for your project.

Sewing Tips #8 – Use Upcycled/Recycled Clothing As Fabric

If you’ve been following me, most likely you know that I LOVE upcycling. Re-purposing an item of clothing to make something else brings me so much joy, and I like the idea of recycling.

Not only do you save money, but you can also create some really cute, unique, and fun items that you don’t see everywhere. Most of my patterns and tutorials have options to use upcycled clothing.

Here is a post and video tutorial where I give several tips and ideas for thrifting and upcycling.

sewing tips upcycling t shirtsOh, the fun things you can make with an upcycle T-Shirt. Check out some of the ideas here.

Sewing Tips #9 – Be O.K. With Making Mistakes

Even the best seamstress will make mistakes. No matter how long you’ve been sewing, you’re going to make mistakes and have to unpick, and that’s o.k!

Once you understand and accept this, it won’t be quite as frustrating when you have to take out a few stitches or even start over again.

Sewing Tips #10 – Take Your Time & Have Fun!

When you are working on a project, I recommend setting up your sewing station, even if that is your kitchen table, and don’t rush.

I went many, many years without a sewing/craft room and I created a lot of items right there on my dining room table. You are going to make a mess, that’s what creative people do, and you can clean everything up when you’re finished.

If you sew in a rushed state, most likely you’re going to be stressed and more prone to making mistakes. Set some YOU TIME aside, and slow down and enjoy the process!

Check out my SEWING ROOM MAKEOVER HERE.

SEWING TIPS JAN

I hope you found these tips helpful! Please reach out if you ever have any concerns or questions and I will try to help out.

You can find my video tutorial on my YouTube channel.

My PDF sewing patterns can be found here on my site.

Have fun sewing!

jan3

Share:

Facebook
Twitter
Pinterest

Connect:

Picture of Jan Howell

Jan Howell

Whether it’s a new recipe, a fun craft, or some handy tips for your garden and home, I hope to empower and inspire you with skills that you can use to create joy, improved health, and to do it in a simple way.

Read More

How To Make a Tomato Pin Cushion // Free Pattern

tomato pin cushion

This adorable tomato pin cushion is such a fun little sewing project and a nice asset to your sewing supplies. You can make this pin cushion out of quilters cotton scraps or of course, a felted wool upcycled red sweater!

tomato pin cushion supplies

Tomato Pin Cushion Materials & Supplies

zipper bracelets items and materials
tomato pin cushion cutting out

Tomato Pin Cushion Instructions

1- Cut out 4 tomato panels

2- Cut out 1 leaf and one stem from felt

tomato pin cushion panels

 

3- Place two of the tomato panels (RST) right sides together and pin in place.

4- Using a ¼ inch seam allowance, sew along one side of each set, back stitching at the beginning and end of seam.

5- Clip seam allowance with little v cuts, making sure not to cut into the seam.

 

6- Place the two tomato panels (RST), lining up the seams.

Pin or clip in place.

7- Starting about 1 inch from the top seam, sew around the tomato stopping about 1 inch from the seam.

Back stitch at the beginning and at the end of seam.

8- Turn the tomato right side facing out.

Poke out curves with your fingers.

tomato pin cushion filling

9- Fill the majority of the tomato full of the crushed walnut shells.

Use a funnel and a cookie sheet underneath to help control spillage.

10- Top off the tomato with the fiberfill stuffing.

11- Double thread a needle with red thread and knot the end.tomato pin cushion closing opening

Sew the opening closed using a ladder stitch. (the video tutorial shows close up of how to sew this stitch).

tomato pin cushion indent

Tomato Pin Cushion Indent

1- To make the tomato indent, double thread a needle with the UPHOLSTERY THREAD.

Knot the end. Insert the needle into the bottom, center of the tomato. Poke the needle out of the top center. (You may need to use a pair of little pliers to pull the needle out).

2- Take BIG stitch, and direct the needle back up through and coming out the bottom of the tomato.

Repeat this process until you have the intent you like. Take a stitch and knot close to the thread. Cut the thread.

Tomato Pin Cushion Stem & Leaf Application

1- Take the 1×1 inch stem piece and apply some craft glue to one side.

Start rolling to form a little stem.

2- Clip a little slit into the center of the leaf.

3- Slip the stem into the slit and extend it about ¼ inch pas the leaf.

4- Apply a light application of hot glue to underneath side of the leaf to adhere the stem to the leaf.tomato pin cushion

5- Using the craft glue, apply a light coat of glue on the underside of leaf.

Press the leaf onto the tomato.

Tomato Pin Cushion Stem & Leaf Application

1- Take the 1×1 inch stem piece and apply some craft glue to one side.

Start rolling to form a little stem.

2- Clip a little slit into the center of the leaf.

3- Slip the stem into the slit and extend it about ¼ inch pas the leaf.

4- Apply a light application of hot glue to underneath side of the leaf to adhere the stem to the leaf.

5- Using the craft glue, apply a light coat of glue on the underside of leaf.

Press the leaf onto the tomato.

Top Stitching Leaf Embroidery

This portion of the project is optional. I like the added character of edging the leaf with a small ladder stitch.

1- Separate out 2-3 strands of green embroidery floss. Thread a needle and knot the end.

2- Starting at one of the inner corners of the leaf, stitch around the edges of the leaf.

That’s it!

I hope you enjoyed that tutorial. Have fun sewing!

Other projects you may be interested in.

 

jan3

Share:

Facebook
Twitter
Pinterest

Connect:

Picture of Jan Howell

Jan Howell

Whether it’s a new recipe, a fun craft, or some handy tips for your garden and home, I hope to empower and inspire you with skills that you can use to create joy, improved health, and to do it in a simple way.

Read More

How To Sew on a Button | Simple Hand Sewing Method

button

Everyone needs to learn how to sew on a button.

Most likely, sometime in your lifetime, you will have a button pop off a shirt or some clothing, and sewing it back on is super easy.

In this post, which includes a VIDEO, TUTORIAL, I will show you how easy it is to use a hand sewing method.

Items & Materials Needed

  • Sewing needle
  • Thread
  • Scissors
  • Toothpick
  • Button

In this post, which includes a VIDEO, TUTORIAL, I will show you how easy it is to use a hand sewing method.

button

DID YOU KNOW?

Most button-up shirts include a spare button. (Yep, kinda like a spare tire).

Look on the side seam of the shirt and there may be a single button sewn to the tag of the shirt.

Pretty cool because it can be a little challenging to find a button that looks exactly like the ones on your shirt, even if you do have a big jar of buttons as I do.

All you have to do is clip off the button and sew it on where the other one came off.

Let me show you how easy it is to do.

In case the shirt you need to replace a button does NOT have an extra button and you don’t have a jar of buttons, here is a link where you can get standard shirt buttons with the basic colors. 

button knotting thread

How to Sew On A Button

  1. Double thread the needle and knot the end. (The video tutorial will show a slick tip on how to easily knot the end of the thread).
  2. Locate the spot where the button needs to be applied.

 

button 3 methods

TWO HOLE BUTTON

  1. Insert the needle from the back of the fabric up into one of the holes in the button.
  2. Stick the needle back into the other hole and pull it out on the underside. DON’T PULL IT ALL THE WAY YET. Take the TOOTHPICK and place it between the two holes, with the thread over the toothpick. Continue to pull the thread tight over the toothpick.
  3. Reinsert the needle back up into the first hole and repeat the process THREE TIMES.
  4. Insert the needle back up into the fabric, BUT NOT THROUGH THE BUTTON this time. The needle should be between the fabric and the button.
  5. Wrap the thread around the strands of thread 3 times to create a shank. Take a small stitch at the base of the shank and knot. Insert the needle back into the fabric close to the stitches and out the back. Knot the thread one more time and clip the thread.
  6. That’s it! Pretty quick and simple, right?

FOUR HOLE BUTTON

You can stitch a four-hole button a few ways. You can make a crisscross or sew two parallel stitches.

Using the crisscross method, instead of sewing into the hole next to the one you just came up from, apply the needle to the hole at a diagonal.

Insert the toothpick in the same manner and make 3 passes on each diagonal. 

Create the thread shank just like you do on the two-hole method, and knot in the same manner.

SHANK BUTTON

Double-thread a needle and know the end.

Locate the place where the button will be applied and insert the needle into the back of the fabric just underneath where the button will go.

shank buttonThread the needle through the button shank and back down into the fabric close to the shank.

 

Share:

Facebook
Twitter
Pinterest

Connect:

Picture of Jan Howell

Jan Howell

Whether it’s a new recipe, a fun craft, or some handy tips for your garden and home, I hope to empower and inspire you with skills that you can use to create joy, improved health, and to do it in a simple way.

Read More

How To Pick the Best Elastic for Your Sewing Projects

ELASTIC VARIETY

There are a lot of types of sewing elastic out there and knowing how to pick the best elastic for your sewing projects will affect the quality and final results of whatever you are making.

In this post I’m going to go over:

  • different types
  • what each one looks like
  • how to use each one

There are three basic types:

Here are four specialty elastics

All are used in different applications and serve a specific purpose.

They come in all kinds of widths, from 1/4 inch to 3 inches and up. Your pattern will typically specify which width to use, but in general, thinner ones are used for things like swimwear and necklines, while wider ones are used for waistbands for skirts and pants.

TYPES OF ELASTIC GUIDE

Here is a table showing the different types  and when you can use them.

Print this out and display it in your sewing room for a quick reference. 

DOWNLOAD AND PRINT THE PDF

chart
BRAIDED ELASTIC

BRAIDED 

Elastic Description

  • Parallel ribs
  • Narrows when stretched
  • Looses stretch if sewn into
  • Rolls more easily

Uses

Sleeve and Neckline Casings

 

KNIT

Description

  • Cross woven
  • Soft to the touch
  • Does not narrow when stretched

Uses

Waistbands (pajama bottoms, men’s briefs, skirts)

Lightweight-medium fabrics

WOVEN ELASTIC

WOVEN (Non-Roll)

Description

  • Horizontal & vertical ribs
  • Firm
  • Does not narrow when stretched
  • More durable

***Tip: use a stronger needle when sewing into it

Uses

Waistbands of pants and skirts with heavy fabrics, houseware items, outerwear

LINGERIE

Description

  • Decorate loops on the side
  • Soft to the touch

Uses

Underwear, bras

SWIM 

Description

  • Does not rot or perish
  • Heat resistant
  • Chlorine resistant

Uses

Swimwear, leotards

FOLD OVER 

Description

  • folds in half
  • soft against the skin

Uses

Leotard, underwear, headbands, hair ties, DIY watch bands

CLEAR

Description

  • Thin and clear

Uses

Gathering knit fabric, shoulder seam stabilizer

Extra Tips 

 

Picking the Right Type

  • First, consider if you will be sewing through the elastic or placing it in a casing. Remember, the braided and woven elastic doesn’t do as well being sewn through.
  • Knit or braided types are better for lighter fabrics, while woven is better for heavyweight fabrics.
  • Use specialty elastics like lingerie, fold-over elastic, and clear elastic for your projects that have special requirements.

Picking the Best Size Elastic

  • Pick the size based on the size of the casing or insertion area and the location on the garment the elastic will be.
  • Neckline elastic needs to be much thinner than waistband elastic, for instance! Your pattern will most likely recommend the width needed.
  • Don’t cut it lengthwise. You’re much better off just getting one that is the right width.

Cutting the Length

  • Test stretch your elastic to check how much it stretches and if it recovers well.
  • You may need a shorter length of braided elastic to accomplish the same stretch as a knitted elastic.
  • Thinner elastics stretch more than wider ones, so take this into account when cutting your length.
  • Use a safety pin to join elastic and test before cutting.

I hope you foun this helpful.

Please send me a note if you have any questions while choosing the elastic for your projects.

Have fun sewing!

jan3

Share:

Facebook
Twitter
Pinterest

Connect:

Picture of Jan Howell

Jan Howell

Whether it’s a new recipe, a fun craft, or some handy tips for your garden and home, I hope to empower and inspire you with skills that you can use to create joy, improved health, and to do it in a simple way.

Read More

A Beginners Guide to Rotary Cutting / Helpful Tips and Tricks

rotary cutting

When it comes to sewing and crafting, rotary cutting makes the task on hand so much easier and quicker. Here are some helpful tips and tricks you might want to know.

In this post I am going to go over:

  • Different types and sizes of rotary blades
  • Rotary blades
  • Changing the blade
  • Cutting mats
  • Rulers
  • Cutting curves
  • Cutting on knit fabrics
  • How to square off fabric pieces with the ruler and rotary cutter
  • Safety tips and useful accessories

Benefits of Using a Rotary Cutting Device

  • Get a clean straight cut
  • Quick cutting
  • Easily cuts multiple layers of fabric
  • Makes cutting shear and delicate fabric much easier
  • Cuts precise fabric for quilting cuts
rotary cutting cutters

Rotary Cutters

There are many different types and brands of rotary cutters out there. I’ve acquired and tried several different types of cutters over the years. Some have been great and some, not so much. Alternative cutting edges include blades for pinking or scalloping, which are interchangeable and less expensive than buying a special pair of shears.

Rotary cutters come in several different sizes. The most common sizes are 28mm, 45mm, and 60mm.

  • 28mm: cutting strips, squaring fabric, cutting curves and intricate pieces
  • 45mm: straight cutting, strip cutting, squaring blocks, can cut through multiple layers at once(up to 8 layers at once), cuts a variety of fabric types including thicker/heavyweight fabrics
  • 60mm: straight cutting, strip cutting, can cut through multiple layers at once(up to 12 layers at once), cuts thicker/heavyweight fabrics with ease

The 45mm cutter is the one I use most frequently and would recommend for your first rotary cutter.

Rotary Cutting Safety

Before I go any further, I want to emphasize how important it is to be cautious when using a rotary cutter. These blades are VERY, VERY SHARP!

You’ll want to make sure your fingers are out of the way of the blade.

Always cut away from your body. You may be tempted, when in a hurry to cut toward you, instead of flipping the fabric, but DON’T DO IT!

Apply the blade cover when not using the cutter. (I will admit, and my viewers catch it), that I don’t always follow this rule. It has come back to bite/cut me, a few times.

I really, really like this rotary cutter because it has an automatic retractable blade. When you cut, you’ll squeeze the handle and when you’re finished cutting and release it, the blade retracts. Its ergonomic handle is very comfortable to use and is one of my favorites!

 

How Do You Know When to Change the Blade?

Rotary cutting blades need to be changed occasionally. It just depends on how much you use it. You can tell if after cutting it leaves uncut sections or just doesn’t cut well. Don’t hesitate in changing it for a new one, because a new blade will make your cutting experience so much better, and safer.

How to Change the Rotary Cutting Blade

Each rotary cutting device will be a little different, but they’re all pretty similar. If you have an Olfa cutter, you can go on their website and find the different types of cutters and see how to change the blade. BE VERY CAUTIOUS when handling the blade.rotary cutting changing blade order

  1. Disassemble the cutter by first unscrewing the nut. ****Very important! As you remove each component, set them down in the order you remove them.
  2. Remove the metal washer and the plastic washer next.
  3. Pull the handle off the stem that holds the blade and set it aside. (I will go over what to do with the old blade in a bit).
  4. Carefully remove the old blade from the stem and replace it with a new blade.rotary cutting blade change
  5. Place the handle back onto the stem followed by the metal washer with the curve FACING UP like a cup.
  6. Next, place the nut back onto the stem and tighten until the front disk begins to spin. DO NOT OVER TIGHTEN!
rotary cutting used blades

What to Do With the Used Rotary Cutting Blades?

As I have mentioned a few times, these blades are super sharp and you don’t want to just throw these babies in the trash. I recommend writing on the blade with a sharpie pen “USED” and placing it back into the case it came in. This way when you fill the case with used blades, you can just throw the case away.

The used blades come in handy when you want to make cuts on paper, cardboard, or other material that you wouldn’t want to use a nice new blade on.

Another tip: Write the date on the new blade, so you can have a reference for how long the blade has been on there.

Rotary Cutting Mats

Let’s go over the mats now. Using a rotary cutter requires a special mat underneath the fabric to protect your table and a special blade. (Don’t try using a rotary cutter without a cutting mat)!

Just like the cutters and rulers, there are A LOT of different kinds, brands and colors of mats out there. There are plastic mats, self-healing mats, and PVC mats. The most popular and known mats are the self-healing mats.

What is a Self-Healing Mat?

Self-healing cutting mats work by ‘absorbing’ the cut from a blade. The mat is made from many tiny particles that are pressed to create a solid surface: one that is not rigid like glass or hard plastic so that the ‘cut’ of the blade can be absorbed amongst those particles.

When you run a blade over and over in the same place on a self-healing mat, you’ll see that the damage becomes more pronounced as the cut makes more of an impact each time. Little fibers get stuck down in the cuts and eventually, you’ll have to replace the mat.

I have found a new kind of mat that I love! It’s called the BIG ROTARY CUTTING MAT. It’s made of PVC and is NOT self-healing.

rotary cutting mats

What is the Advantage of a PVC Mat?

  • Although it isn’t self-healing, it is quite durable and comes in all kinds of sizes up to 40” x 72”.
  • This mat is not supposed to warp and comes with a 5-year guarantee.
  • The company is a family business and is based in the USA. I like supporting local businesses.
  • Your rotary cutting blades will stay sharp longer.
  • You don’t have to put as much pressure on the blade.
  • It’s reversible and can be flipped to an all-white mat.

I have several sizes of these mats, but I LOVE my 36” x 60” mat. It fits really nicely on my sewing table where I sit my sewing machines.  When you cut on this mat, it will make little raised surfaces, but no worries. They send a little plastic scraper that you simply scrape over the surface to smooth it out, good as new.

Rotary Cutting Rulers

If you want to make straight cuts, which I’m sure you’ll want to do, you’ll need a ruler. This ruler needs to be made of durable plastic and there are a lot of different styles, widths, and colors out there.

They range in different widths and lengths. I would recommend getting a basic size to start with. I like this one. It’s 6.5 inches x 24 inches. 

rotary cutting ruler

Rotary Cutting Tips

Rotary cutters are great to square off a piece of fabric if you’re making a quilt or something that needs a square edge. (Watch the video tutorial where I demo exactly how to do this).

There is nothing more frustrating than to make a straight cut and have the ends not cut through all the way. TO AVOID THIS ISSUE, start cutting before the edge of the fabric and cut a few inches off the end of the fabric.

You can buy little accessories that make cutting a little easier. This BIG Mat Company has several different items.

I really like the ruler stabilizer. It is a little plastic rectangle that you can apply to the end of your ruler to act like a T-square or you can apply it anywhere on the mat as a straight edge. It’s really quite helpful.

***When cutting a straight strip, press firmly on the ruler and KEEP YOUR FINGERS OUT OF THE WAY!

I hope this was helpful and that you have fun cutting and creating.

Let me know in the comments below if you have any great rotary cutting tips to share with us.

Share:

Facebook
Twitter
Pinterest

Connect:

Picture of Jan Howell

Jan Howell

Whether it’s a new recipe, a fun craft, or some handy tips for your garden and home, I hope to empower and inspire you with skills that you can use to create joy, improved health, and to do it in a simple way.

Read More

DIY Top Knot Headband | Easy Sewing Tutorial

top knot headband feature2

When you’re looking for a cute baby gift, this top knot headband is so quick and easy to make! They can be made with a minimal amount of knit fabric and OF COURSE, an UPCYCLED T-SHIRT! 

top knot headband tshirt

Choose fabrics that have good stretch to them. These top knot headbands are cute made up of solid colors or prints. I’ve been known to buy shirts, dresses, and skirts for the fabric to make other things with. In fact, I do it all the time, especially clothing on clearance racks! So be on the lookout in your closet and on clearance racks for some cute stretchy fabric that you can make headbands or other baby clothing with.

Choose fabrics that have good stretch to them. These top knot headbands are cute made up with solid colors or prints. I’ve been known to buy shirts, dresses, and skirts for the fabric to make other things with. In fact, I do it all the time, especially clothing on clearance racks! So be on the lookout in your closet and on clearance racks for some cute stretchy fabric that you can make headbands or other baby clothing with.

Make sure you are checking out my SEWING PATTERN STORE, where you’ll find a big handful of other things you can make for babies.

top knot headband

These topknot headbands look adorable on babies, toddlers, and even adults. They can be made to fit ANY SIZE HEAD, just follow the head measuring instructions to get a perfect fit.

You can make these headbands using a regular sewing machine; serger or you can even sew them by hand. If you don’t have a sewing machine, be sure to check out my HANDSEWING tutorial where I show you how to sew a stretch stitch by hand.

Top Knot Headband Materials & Items Needed

  • Sewing machine/Serger (optional)
  • Scissors/Rotary Cutter-Mat
  • Knit Fabric or UPCYCLED KNIT CLOTHING
  • Pins/Fabric clips (optional)
  • Measuring tape
  • Turning stick
top knot headband measurement

HEAD MEASUREMENT

The best way to get the correct size is to measure the head you are making the headband for. If that’s not possible, refer to the Average Head Circumference Chart. Knit fabric will stretch to fit a wide variety of heads sizes in that range so don’t be too stressed about it!

Using a measuring tape, measure the widest part of the head. Write that measurement down.

CUTTING OUT
Cut a strip of knit fabric (6-8 inches/15.5 cm x HEAD MEASUREMENT)

Feel free to alter the thickness of the headband. You may want a thicker, bulkier, or even a thinner headband. It’s all your preference and you can cut them out accordingly.

Make sure you cut out the strips with the stretchiness of the fabric for the widest part.

topknot headband tshirtUpcycled t-shirts work really well

SEWING TOP KNOT HEADBAND

SEAM ALLOWANCE IS 3/8 INCH

 

STITCH TYPE: 

Use a lightning bolt stitch, a small narrow zigzag stitch, this is so the seams won’t pop and break when the fabric is stretched, or you can use a 3-4 thread serger.

TOP KNOT HEADBAND

Fold the fabric strip in half lengthwise. Sew along the unfinished edge. Backstitch at the beginning and end of the seam.

Turn right side facing out using a turning stick or the eraser end of a pencil.

Align the seam so it is in the center of the headband.

top knot headband topknot headband knot

Take the short ends and tie a very loose knot.

Place the shorts ends Right Sides Together and with the seams lined up. Using a regular straight stitch, sew along the unfinished edge using a 3/8 inch seam allowance. (Basically the edge of your presser foot). Trim seam allowance.

 

I love this method because there is NO SEAM on the back of the headband, therefore making it so much more comfortable to wear.

Slide the knot down so it covers the seam you just made. Adjust the knot how you want it and you’re finished!

Tadah! Now wasn’t that simple!

I hope you have fun making these top knot headbands as much as I do. 

 

Play Video

Share:

Facebook
Twitter
Pinterest

Connect:

Sewing Corners and Curves | Serger Tips and Tricks

sewing corners and curves

Serging around corners and curves can be a little tricky, but when you know these handy tips and tricks, it’s no problem at all.

In this tutorial, I’m going to show you how to easily sew around square outer and inner corners and how to sew curves without any puckering.

For those of you who are visual learners, you can watch the video tutorial at the end of the post. I give several other serger tips that you won’t want to miss!

Typical Corners and Curves Sewing Projects

Of course, sewing around corners and curves is not a big issue with a regular sewing machine, but when you are using a serger (3 or 4 thread) it is different.

For one thing, the serger leaves a chain of stitching that can get quite messy and add bulk to your project if you leave it too long when turning. No more of that!

Before I learned these tips and tricks, I had stitching tails all over the place, which didn’t look really clean and finished.

Before trying any of these tips, I recommend getting some scrap pieces of fabric and just practicing.

It takes a little practice, and every fabric is different.

Tips for Sewing OUTER CURVES

Start with lining up the fabric edge you are sewing with the side of your serger plate (the side with the blade).

This is where you want to keep your focus point. As you slowly sew, you’ll be gently rotating the fabric to the right, keeping the edge of the fabric aligned with the edge of the cutting plate.

Be careful not to twist too much or you’ll get puckers. Just let the machine feed the fabric and you turn the fabric. You’ll get the hang of it real fast.

Tips for sewing  INNER CURVES

The same thing as with outer curves, except instead of rotating the fabric to the right, you’ll rotate it to the left.

Inner curves are a tad trickier because they have a smaller radius. Just go slow. Any slight puckering that occurs can be pressed out.

Most likely, you’ll be sewing a lot more outer corners than inner corners, but knowing how to sew an inner corner using this method is a GAME CHANGER!

Sewing Corners and Curves outer corners

Outer Corners

To sew an outer corner, sew up to the edge of the fabric and then take two more stitches by TURNING THE HANDWHEEL TOWARDS YOU.

Lift up the presser foot, gently pull the fabric back a bit to disengage the threads from the looper hooks.

This will enable you to PIVET THE FABRIC around. Align the fabric edge with the knife plate edge and the top of the fabric so that when the needles come down, it will be just inside the edge of the fabric.

Continue to sew. It’s pretty simple. Do some practicing on scrap fabric. It’s actually quite fun, and notice what clean corners you have all finished nicely!

Sewing inner curves

Inner Corners

Begin sewing, and when you get close to the corner, flip the bottom of the fabric edge to line up with the knife edge of your serger. THIS WILL MAKE A NATURAL PLEAT! Flatten the pleat (it will look like a little ice cream cone).

Continue to sew straight, keeping the fabric along the edge until you have completed the corner.

Open up the fabric and BAM, there you have it!

If there is just slight puckering, this can be pressed out.

sewing corners and curves clip cornerNOTE:  if the fabric is thicker, you may need to clip the corner just slightly 1/16 of an inch before sewing. You shouldn’t have a problem with lighter-weight fabrics.

Once again, practice and test the fabric you’re using for your project to see whether you need to clip the corner.

I hope that was helpful. Please leave a comment if you have any questions.

Share:

Facebook
Twitter
Pinterest

Connect:

Picture of Jan Howell

Jan Howell

Whether it’s a new recipe, a fun craft, or some handy tips for your garden and home, I hope to empower and inspire you with skills that you can use to create joy, improved health, and to do it in a simple way.

Read More

DIY Neck Cooling Scarf | Easy Sewing Tutorial

neck cooling scarf youmakeitsimple.com

When it’s hot and you need to keep cool, this DIY neck cooling scarf works like a charm. The scarf is made of simple cotton fabric and filled with water beads. These polymer crystals or water beads are quite amazing and when soaked will plump up with water, expand and then release the moisture slowly. That’s what makes this cooling scarf so nice is that it will stay wet and applies gentle moisture to your skin that keeps you cool for hours.

This is a very simple sewing project that even a beginner seamstress can handle. Making a neck cooling scarf will only take you about ten minutes to make, and it only takes a minimal amount of fabric. These are great to wear when you are working outside, or inside and can be worn by adults and children.

What types of water beads/crystal are best to use?

There are lots of varieties out there. The “crystals” are very small chunks that almost look like a powder, while the “beads” are smooth spheres.

I like to use spherical beads for comfort and ease of use, and some say that the small crystal powder can absorb into the fabric.

You will be AMAZED at how plump the beads get when soaked in water. One teaspoon turns into 3-4 cups once soaked!

You can find the beads in most craft stores, floral shops, and even some hardware stores in the garden section.

They were all sold out in the stores in my location, so I bought them online and was very pleased with this brand. (clear beads).

You can find the beads in most craft stores, floral shops, and even some hardware stores in the garden section.

They were all sold out in the stores in my location, so I bought them online and was very pleased with this brand. (clear beads)

Neck Cooling Scarf Materials & Items Needed

  • Water beads or water crystals
  • Cotton fabric
  • Scissors/rotary cutter (optional)
  • Sewing machine
  • Iron
  • Pins/ fabric clips
  • Measuring tape
  • Cookie sheet (to keep the beads from going all over the place)

Neck Cooling Scarf Instructions

1-Hydrate the beads.

If you are using beads, hydrate them before placing them into the scarf.

There are so many different bead sizes that it’s hard to know how much they’ll expand. If you fill the scarf tool full they can expand too much and pop the seams.

If you are using the crystals you can apply the powder before soaking. JUST REMEMBER YOU’LL ONLY NEED JUST A LITTLE BIT! 1 teaspoon of powder, split into different pockets.

neck cooling scarfThe bead to water ratio is 1 teaspoon/3 cups water. Get a big bowl or tub to put them in. It may take a few hours for them to hydrate completely. I like to soak my beads the night before I plan on sewing.

neck cooling scarf cutting fabric

2 -Cut a piece of cotton fabric 4.5/10 cm x 42-44/112 cm inches.

Most bolts of cotton fabric are 42-44 inches wide, so just cut a strip of fabric 4.5 inches.neck cooling scarf cutting ends

3 -Fold the long edges of the fabric strip in half and CUT OFF THE SELVAGE EDGES AT A 45° ANGLE to form a taped edge.

4 -Open up the strip and fold in half again with the RIGHT SIDES FACING EACH OTHER.]

5 -Pin or clip in place.

You are going to leave a space un-sewn about 4 inches/10cm long to turn to the scarf. Find the center and mark that 4 inch space so you don’t forget and sew.

red clips
neck cooling scarf tip
neck cooling scarf sewing

6 -Sew together.

Using a straight stitch, start sewing at one tapered edge and sew all the way around to the other end. DON’T FORGET TO LEAVE THE OPENING. When you come to the red clip, backstitch and then lift up your presser foot and move to the next red clip. Backstitch and continue to sew the rest of the seam backstitching at the end.

7 -Clip corners.

neck cooling scarf turning

8 -Using a turning stick, turn the tube right sides out.

9 -Press seams out.

Fold the seam allowance under where you left the opening and press in place.

10 -Fold the scarf in half and measure 10.5 inches/27 cm from the fold and mark both layers with a pin.

This is where you will stitch the scarf to create the pocket that will hold the beads. You don’t want the whole scarf to be filled with beads, just the portion that wraps around the neck. (Some folks like to make 3 separate pockets, and this works well if you are using the powder, but if you are using the beads, I find it’s not necessary and only takes more time).

11 -Sew vertical seams

Sew two seams where you marked with pins. Backstitch at the beginning and end of seam.

neck cooling scarf filling with beads

12 -Fill scarf with beads.

Now it’s time to fill the scarf with beads. Place a cookie sheet under your workspace so you don’t have beads rolling all over the place. YOU DON’T WANT PETS OR CHILDREN INGESTING THESE BEADS!!!! You can use a funnel that will fit the beads, but I find that you can just grab a handful and feed them into the hole you left. Fill one side and then the other. Don’t overfill as they may expand a little more and pop the seam.

13 -Sew the opening closed.

Once the scarf is full, place the opening edges together and clip in place. You can hand-sew the opening closed or I use the sewing machine. I prefer using a 1/8 inch seam allowance on the sewing machine, it’s much quicker.

14 -Clips threads and you’re finished.

neck cooling scarf soaking

15 -How to soak and hydrate the neck cooling scarf

The beads will eventually dry up, but it takes several days. To reactivate the neck cooling scarf, just soak it in water for a couple of hours. If you want to dry it out, just leave it in the sun.

The beads will shrivel up to almost nothing, allowing you to store the wrap flat until the next time you need it.

Some friends and I are currently making a bunch of these up and taking them to the homeless shelter, all hydrated and cooled.

Perhaps this could be a project for those in your own community who are out in this heat; just a little way to give back.

Get in your fabric stash and make a few neck cooling scarves for yourself, family, and those in need.

Share:

Facebook
Twitter
Pinterest

Connect:

4 Basic Sewing Machine Seams and Seam Allowance Tips

seams and seam allowances

In this tutorial I am going to go over the basic sewing machine seams and give you some seam allowance tips.

What are seams?

Seams are the building blocks of a clothing item and are the points of connection between fabric pieces. As a beginner seamstress, the first thing you will learn how to do is sew a basic seam. (Sew two pieces of fabric together).

There are several different types of sewing stitches that you can use to make up seams. Be sure to check out my SEW SIMPLE SERIES, A BEGINNERS GUIDE TO SEWING, where I show you all the basic stitches, seams and guide you through several easy sewing projects. (PATTERNS INCLUDED).

seam allowance

What is a seam allowance?

Whenever you sew seams, you’ll have some kind of seam allowance. This is the distance from the seamline to the raw edge of the fabric, which allows the fabric pieces to be durably connected without fraying or coming unsewn.

 

Here are some basic seam allowance “facts” and “rules”

  • The width of the seam allowance depends on the type of fabric and the seam finishing technique used. A thicker, bulkier fabric requires a larger seam allowance while thinner, lightweight fabrics work well with a narrower seam allowance.
  • The most commonly used seam allowance measures 3/8” to ½”.
  • Some seam allowances are finished to ensure seam durability and prevent the raw fabric edges from fraying. Fabrics like knit or polyester do not need to be finished. Here are some simple techniques to finish seams (NO SERGER NEEDED).
  • After the seam is stitched, the seam allowance should always be ironed down in a specified direction in order for the seam to lay flat (you’ll see a demonstration of this in the sewing tutorial video below).
    All conventional sewing machines have a seam allowance guide to the right of the sewing machine needle. In order to sew each seam at the proper seam allowance, the raw edge of the fabric is aligned with the appropriate seam allowance guideline according to the required seam allowance length. In my tutorials, I usually give some great tips on things you can do and use to make following these guides easier.
  • Most patterns will give you the SEAM ALLOWANCE requirements and measurement for that specific project. If it doesn’t, use the standard 3/8 inch seam allowance. (This by the way is just the edge of your normal presser foot).

BASIC 3/8 INCH SEAMS INSTRUCTIONS

  1. Place the two pieces of fabric you are working with together, matching edges and pin in place. Use the 3/8 inch guide on the top plate of your machine to line up the edges of the fabric, or if your presser foot edge is at that measurement, you can just use the edge of the presser foot as your guide.pressing seams
  2. Sew the seam. Open up the seam allowance and press flat using an iron.

FLAT FELLED SEAMS INSTRUCTIONS

A flat felled seam is basically an overlapping seam that’s sewn flat. When the seam is complete, there are no raw edges showing. It’s used frequently in menswear because it’s extremely durable and sturdy and provides a neat finish. If you’re wearing jeans, take a look at the seams. They are almost certainly flat-felled. Use a flat felled seam on shirts or trousers, which see a lot of stress, and you’ll get a durable finish.

Here’s how to go about sewing a flat felled seam.

  1. Pin fabric with right sides together. You will be using a 5/8 inch seam allowance. tape seam allowance guideI like to place a piece of masking or painter’s tape onto the sewing plate at the 5/8 inch mark. This will help you see more clearly and help you guide the fabric along as you sew.pressing seam allowance
  2. Instead of pressing the seam open, you’re going to fold the seam allowance to one side and press.flat felled seam stitching
  3. Flip the fabric over to the right side. Now sew a straight line on the side that the seam allowance is pressed to.1/8 inch seam allowance
  4. Sew 1/8 inch from the seam line fold. TIP: Most presser feet will have little notches indicating 1/8 inch marks. This is nice to use this feature when sewing this seam. Simple line the fabric up with that right 1/8 inch guide and sew away.

FINISHED FLAT FELLED SEAMS INSTRUCTIONS

trimming seam allowance

  1. Sew the seam with a ½ seam allowance. Before pressing the seam, take your scissors and trim away ¼ inch from the right seam allowance.pressing seam allowance
  2. Fold the uncut seam allowance over the cut seam allowance and press in place.
  3. Now fold the top seam allowance under ¼ inch encasing the cut allowance. Press in place.
  4. Topstitch in place along the folded edge to secure in place.

FRENCH SEAMS INSTRUCTIONS

French seams are perfect to use on lightweight, sheer fabrics, or lace. I like using this seam when I make pillowcases. The seam encasing all of the fraying fabric edges inside a tiny seam allowance of 1/4″ (5mm). French seams can be great to use if you haven’t got an overlocker (serger) and want to create a perfect finish to your project.

  1. When sewing a French seam, you start by placing WRONG SIDES OF THE FABRIC TOGETHER, instead of right sides together.French seam 1/4 inch seam
  2. Sew the first seam using a ¼ inch seam allowance. Then, fold the fabric along the seam line, so the right sides of the fabric are together and the stitching is at the edge of the fold. Press well, so you are working with a sharp crease at the fold on the seam. You may want to pin the fabric edge, especially if you are using a slippery fabric.3/8 inch seam allowance
  3. Now sew another seam using a 3/8 inch seam allowance.

     

  4. Press the finished seam to one side or the other.

Play Video

There you have it, 4 basic seams for you to use.

HINT: my SEW SIMPLE COURSE COMES WITH INSTRUCTIONS AND MEASUREMENTS FOR ALL SIZES OF PILLOWCASES.

OTHER BLOG POSTS YOU MAY BE INTERESTED IN:

7 Sewing Machine Presser Feet and How To Use Them

Unpicking Serger Stitches the EASY WAY

SEWING BY HAND | Most Important Stitches to Know

Have fun sewing my friends!

Share:

Facebook
Twitter
Pinterest

Connect:

DIY Upcycled T Shirt Bags | Sew and No-Sew Methods

DIY Upcycled T Shirt Bags

Recycling and upcycling are one of my passions, and making these t-shirt bags is another way to reduce waste and find another use for unwanted clothing.

I love these bags! They make great grocery bags and activity bags, and you can even use them as a purse if you want. You will be surprised how durable they are!!

Making and using these DIY T-Shirt bags is a great way to reduce waste and recycle unwanted clothing.

They make great grocery bags and activity bags, and you can even use them as a purse if you want. You will be surprised how durable they are!

These bags are super easy and quick to make (10 minutes), and they will help reduce shopping bag pollution.

Did you know that one hundred billion grocery bags are used in the United States each year?  This means that the average American family gets 1,500 bags from shopping trips. That’s NOT OK!

That’s a lot of bags. Even if they end up in the garbage, 100 billion bags still take up space. Whether they’re stuck in a tree, floating in the breeze, or sitting in a trash pile, these bags don’t decompose.

Because they’re made from petroleum, toxic chemicals can seep into soil and water.

Pollution on land is a problem, but what about these bags when they get into the ocean?  It’s dangerous to animals.

Sea turtles, marine mammals, and fish confuse the bags with prey, such as jellyfish, and eat the plastic imposters. Ingestion of these bags can lead to malnutrition and, eventually, starvation.

Bags can also become caught on waterfowl or coral and wrap around the animals, causing injury or death.

Ok, I think you get the picture. Making and using these upcycled t-shirt bags will help reduce plastic bag pollution. I love that, and I love upcycling t-shirts, as most of you know.

I am going to show you two different methods. A no-sew method (in case you don’t have access to a sewing machine) and a simple sewing method. 

I prefer the sewing method myself because it is a lot faster!

Let’s jump right into the tutorial.

Upcycled T-Shirt Items & Materials Needed

  • T-shirt
  • Scissors
  • Masking tape (optional no-sew method)
  • Sewing machine/serger (sewing method)
  • Fabric clips/pins (sewing method)

T-Shirt Bag Instructions

NO-SEW METHOD

  • Turn the t-shirt wrong side out.
  • Cut off the sleeve just inside the arm seam.
  • Fold the shirt in half lengthwise.
  • Cut out the bag opening by cutting a deeper neck line. (About the depth of the armholes).
  • Decide how deep you want the bag to be +3 inches/7.5 cm. Cut the bottom off if you want it shorter. You’ll really only need to shorten if you are using a very larger t-shirt.
  • Measure 3 inches/7.5 cm from the bottom of the shirt, take a piece of masking tape or painter’s tape and apply it to the shirt to mark this point.
  • Cut little slits along the bottom of the shirt up to the tape line, ½ -3/4 inches/1 cm apart.
  • Starting from one side, tie one strip from the front to the adjacent strip on the back in a double knot. Continue tying knots until the bottom is all tied.

There will be little holes between the knots. To close those up, take one tie from the first knot and tie it to one of the ties of the second knot diagonally. Do this to all the knots.

Reinforce the end knots by tying them again.

Flip right side out, and there you have it.

T-Shirt Bag Sewing Method

  • Follow the steps for the no-sew method, but instead of cutting the strips, simply sew the bottom closed.

 

  • Set your sewing machine to a LIGHTNING BOLT STITCH or SMALL ZIGZAG STITCH. (SHORT & NARROW).

You can use a serger if you have one.

  • Make a tuck/pleat in the bottom of the bag by folding the sides of the shirt over about 4 inches/10 cm. Clip or pin in place.
  • Use about a ½ inch seam allowance. Sew across the bottom, backstitching at the beginning and end of the seam.
  • Turn right side out and ta-dah you’re all finished. Such an easy project.

Get in your closet and find some t-shirts you no longer want or need and MAKE T-shirt BAGS!

Share:

Facebook
Twitter
Pinterest

Connect:

DIY Baby Bib Tutorial | Reversible

baby bib reversible youmakeitsimple.com

Sewing for babies is the best thing ever. This reversible baby bib is a fun and quick little project that is great for even a beginner seamstress. You can apply snaps or Velcro and it has an optional food pocket.

You can use two different contrasting fabrics, or use the same fabric for both sides. The baby bib can be made with several types of fabric: flannel, terry cloth, quilting cotton, sturdy knit fabrics, or laminate cloth.

These make the best baby gifts! Combine a few bibs with some burp cloths, a mitered corner baby blanket, and a bottle of yummy smelling baby lotion and you’ve got an adorable baby gift, a gift that is made from the heart.

Be sure to check out my other baby tutorials.

Baby Bib Materials and Items Needed

Baby Bib Fabric Choices & Requirements

Bibs can be made using several types of fabrics; flannel, terry cloth, quilting cotton, knit, and Pull laminate finished cloth (used for diapers). 

You can make the baby bib reversible and you can use two different prints or colors.

 

Baby Bib Pattern Assembly

Due to the large size of the pattern, you will need to assemble the pattern first.

Simply fold or cut the dotted line on pattern piece 2 and place it on top of and on the dotted line on piece 1 where indicated.

Tape in place and cut out the chosen size.

There is a size for infants, toddlers, children, or a small teething bib. 

*YOU CAN MAKE THE PATTERN SMALLER OR LARGER. I give you specific instructions in the video on how to easily do that. 

Cutting Out

Fold the fabric in half, lengthwise with selvage edges (the finished edge of fabric) parallel to the fold.

Place the pattern piece so the grain arrow is parallel to the selvage edge. 

baby bib cutting outCut out 2 bibs on the fold. You can double fold and cut all 4 pieces at once if you are using the same fabric for the front and back.

FOOD POCKET (optional)

Cut out a piece of fabric approximately 8 x 12 inches. Fold the fabric in half crosswise and then fold in half again lengthwise.

Place the food pocket pattern along folds where indicated. Cut out one.

 

Sewing Baby Bib

If applying a FOOD POCKET, fold the pocket fabric piece in half lengthwise.

* Adding a tag along the pocket top is a cute addition, but optional. Or you can add a tag in the seam somewhere.

Place the folded pocket on top of one of the bib pieces right side facing up. Align the edges and clip in place.

 

Baste in place using a ½ seam allowance and a long basting stitch. Do not backstitch.

Place the other bib piece right side facing down on top of the other bib piece. Line up edges and clip or pin in place.

You will be leaving about 4 inches unsewn on one of the sides of the bib. (This will allow you to turn the bib inside out).

Starting on one side, sew all the way around using a    3/8 inch seam allowance. Backstitch at the beginning and end of the seam.

Clip outer curves with V notches and inner curves with little slits.

Using a turning stick, poke out the curves and edges.

REMOVE BASTING STITCHES FROM FOOD POCKET

Close the opening you left open by folding the edges in to match seam allowance. Press and clip in place.

baby bib topstitching

Topstitch all the way around using a 1/8 – ¼ inch seam allowance.

Baby Bib Snap Application

You can use KAM snaps, which is what I prefer and use. Or you can use sew-in snaps or even Velcro.

Place the pattern on top of the bib, lining up curves. (Notice: you will be placing two snaps on one side of the bib and only one on the other. This will allow you to adjust the neck size).

Using the awl, that comes with the snap kit, poke the holes where indicated to mark the snap points.

Follow product instructions for the snap or Velcro application.

Tadah!

Here are some other baby projects you may be interested in:

BABY BEANIE HATS

DIY MITERING CORNER BABY BLANKETS

SEWING WITH PLUSH FABRICS

DIY FABRIC LABELS

Have fun sewing!

Play Video

Share:

Facebook
Twitter
Pinterest

Connect:

Sewing With Plush Fabric | Tips & Tricks

Sewing With Plush Fabric

Items made with plush fabric are the coziest things ever; however, sewing with plush fabric can be a little tricky. In this post I am going to give you some great tips & tricks that will make the sewing process a lot easier and save you a lot of grief!

What Is Plush Fabric?

The fabrics that are considered “plush” are:

  • Faux Fur                 
  • Fleece
  • Minky (also known as “Cuddle” fabric
  • Velvet
  • Chenille
  • Velveteen

These fabrics usually have a “nap” to them. If you run your hand up and down the fabric, they’ll be smoother in one direction and may even look a shade different in color.

plush fabric blanket

What do you do with plush fabric?

These cozy fabrics make really nice toys, blankets, pillows and jackets. It’s not just for babies! We, adults, deserve to have something COZY! 

The fabric is available in solids, prints, embossed and double-sided. Embossed Cuddle is a favorite. You get softness plus a subtle design that pops up from the nap, such as the classic dimple as well as hearts, stars, paisley, and more. Next time you’re at the fabric store, check and see what they have available.

You can buy the fabric by the yard, or you can upcycle a throw blanket or item of clothing (like I like to do). The bunny in the photo below was made from an upcycled fleece jacket.

PLUSCH FABRIC BUNNY

Sewing With Plush Fabric Tips & Tricks

  • Things are going to get messy! Plush fabric sheds when cut; use a rotary cutter to minimize fuzz. After cutting, place pieces in a dryer with a damp washcloth on low heat for about 10 minutes. Keep a lint roller, masking tape, and vacuum handy.

plush fabric stretch

  • This fabric has some stretch to it. It stretches on the crosswise grain but very little along the lengthwise grain (parallel to the selvages). If you are sewing two pieces of fabric together, it’s important to line up stretch with stretch and the grain with the grain, or you’ll get twisting and uneven seams.

plush fabric pinning

  • Use a lot of pins! This fabric will do a lot of shifting from the time you pin until the time you actually sew, so place a lot of pins to hold things in place. I love these long, floral tip pins. It makes them easy to see, so you don’t accidentally leave pins in your projects. 
  • Attach a walking foot, if you have one. If you are going to be sewing on these types of fabrics, it’s well worth the investment. Most sewing machines have one available if it doesn’t come with one. It makes a huge difference when sewing on the fleece, Minky, upcycled sweaters, etc. *If you don’t have one, be sure to hold the bottom layer of fabric a little more firmly when sewing. What happens is, the bottom fabric gets fed through the machine more quickly and you’ll get uneven sewing.
  • If you’re sewing a different type of fabric together with the plush, place the plush fabric on the bottom when sewing.
  • Use a ballpoint needle, 90/14 (Ge my NEEDLE GUIDE HERE).
  • Set your stitch length to a longer-than-normal stitch (3-4) to keep seams from puckering.
  • Do not use an iron. The fabric can melt!
  • Use a slightly bigger seam allowance. I like to use a ½ inch seam allowance when sewing on plush.
  • Using a rotary cutter will give you a cleaner cut edge.
  • If sewing together with a different type of fabric, especially cotton, be sure to wash the cotton piece first! Plush fabric will not shrink, but the cotton will.

Sewing with plush fabric is really not that bad once you get the hang of it. I wished I would have known this stuff before I attempted my first plush fabric project.

I have a video tutorial showing you how to make a plush self-binding blanket, and I go over these tips in it. WATCH THE VIDEO ABOVE.

You may also find the fleece binding tutorial helpful.

Check out my sewing patterns HERE.

I hope this was helpful and that you’re now ready and excited to make a fun baby blanket or teddy bear.

7 Sewing Machine Presser Feet and How To Use Them

presser feet youmakeitsimple.com

Have you ever gone through the sewing machine attachments that come with your sewing machine and wondered, “What the heck is this used for?”

I certainly have! In this post, I am going to walk you through the 7 most basic sewing machine presser feet and how to use them.

Whatever type of sewing machine you have, it will come with some basic presser feet attachments.

Some of them may look very intimidating and seem complicated to use. NO WORRIES.

By the end of this tutorial, you are going to be all ready and hopefully, excited to tackle any sewing project.

What are presser feet?

Presser feet are small attachments that are added to the machine to help feed the fabric through the machine while you sew.

There are many types of presser feet and each does something different to make the sewing task easier.

hump jumper tip

Make sure to use presser feet that are compatible with the model of the sewing machine! Some feet are universal and can be used and several models of sewing machines, but others are not.

When you purchase a new foot, it will tell what models it can be used on.

 

7 Basic Presser Feet

Standard Presser Foot

This foot is most likely the foot you’ll be using for most of your sewing projects. It’s used for standard and decorative stitches.

  • Straight stitch
  • Satin stitch
  • Zigzag stitch
  • Overcasting
  • Other fancy stitches
  • Zipper Foot

Most machines include a zipper foot. There are several types of zipper feet and different ways to attach them. Depending on the setup of your machine, will determine how you attach it.

It’s pretty obvious what the zipper foot is used for, but how does it work?

Most commonly a zipper foot has gaps on either side of the foot. Depending on which side of the zipper you are sewing you position the zipper tape under the relevant side of the zipper foot. You stitch along one side of the zip then repeat for the other side.

The gaps in the foot allow you to sew close to the zipper teeth on either side of your zipper. If your sewing machine is capable, you can also adjust the needle position to more precisely place your stitching.

You can also use the zipper foot to attach trimmings and that have a tape, just like you do with a zipper. A zipper foot can also be used to apply piping. (There is a piping foot, which makes the task even easier

Overcasting/Overedge Foot

This foot is wonderful if you need to finish the raw edges of fabric but don’t have a serger or overlock machine. 

There is a little bar in the center of the foot that works to wrap the thread around the edge of the fabric for a neat finish and to prevent fraying.

There are usually a couple of options for overcasting stitches on most machines.

ou may need to play around with the length and width of the stitch to get the result you are looking for.

I always recommend practicing on a piece of scrap fabric first.

You can watch the video tutorial where I will show you in more detail how to do the overcast stitch on your sewing machine.

The overcasting stitch can be used even if you have a serger. It comes in handy for quick, small, and hard to reach places.

Blind Hem Foot

This foot is a nice option if you want to hem a pair of pants, curtains, skirt, or other items that you don’t want to be able to see the seam and you don’t want to sew it by hand.

The foot has a gap down the center and the right side of the foot is wider than the left side.

The left side is also slightly raised compared to the right side because once the fabric is folded correctly there will be three layers of fabric to fit under the left side of the foot (two layers of the garment fabric itself plus the hem allowance), but only one layer on the right side

You can watch the detailed blind hem video here

As I mentioned before, take a piece of scrap fabric and test it out there before sewing on your project.

It takes a little tweaking to get the stitch how you want it.

Select the blind hem stitch on your machine and position the foot with the right side of the foot snugly against the fold in the fabric.

The right side of the foot will act as a guide as you sew making it easy to sew accurately and ensure the stitches are falling correctly.

As you sew the stitches will be straight and then it will jog over to just catch the main garment fabric as it joins it to the hem allowance.

You may need to play with the needle position to get your stitches in the correct place.

You will see a minimal amount of stitching from the right side, especially if you are using thread that is the same color as your fabric.

Buttonhole Foot

This foot can look intimidating, as at least it did for me until I used it. 

There are different types of buttonhole feet and some are fancier than others. I’m going to show and demonstrate how to use a one-step buttonhole foot.

Most machines will come with at least a sliding or adjustable foot, which is similar to the one-step.

The one-step buttonhole attachment looks similar to the sliding and adjustable buttonhole feet, but it also has an area at the back of the foot where you can insert your button.

You slide the foot until the button is fitting snugly in the gap then engage a lever or similar on your machine (instructions for this feature will be in your manual).

This allows the machine to measure the button and stitch out the correct-sized buttonhole in one simple step. I LOVE IT!

Practice on a scrap piece of fabric first. It’s actually quite fun making buttonholes!

Button Foot

You can always just sew a button on by hand but if you’re not a fan of hand sewing this foot could be a very welcome addition to your sewing kit! This foot allows you to sew a 2 or 4 hole button, and in different sizes, depending on the size of the button you are using.

Some machines will have a special setting for applying a button. But if it doesn’t NO WORRIES!

Simply set the stitch width according to the gap between the holes on the button and set the stitch length to “0”. The machine does all the work. If your machine does not have the special button setting, when you complete the stitching, move the needle position to the left or right and set the width to “0” and take several stitches in the same hole to knot the thread. Or you can just manually knot the two threads on the underside.

Viola!

Applique Foot

An appliqué foot is shorter in length than most presser feet and has a wider area for sewing all kinds of decorative stitches. The foot is shorted in length which makes maneuvering curves and angles easier.

The front of the foot sits on the fabric to maintain the required pressure; however, the back of the foot is raised to allow stitches and fabric to feed through easily.

Simply attach the foot to your machine, select an appliqué stitch of your choice, and sew around your chosen design quickly and easily. One of my favorite stitches to use is the blanket stitch.

There you have it. I hope this was helpful and allows you to feel more confident and familiar with those foreign-looking attachments that come with your sewing machine.

hump jumper tip

It’s always a good idea to read through the manual that comes with your sewing machine. There may be some good tips in there to help make your sewing experience a lot easier.

Share:

Facebook
Twitter
Pinterest

Connect:

Picture of Jan Howell

Jan Howell

Whether it’s a new recipe, a fun craft, or some handy tips for your garden and home, I hope to empower and inspire you with skills that you can use to create joy, improved health, and to do it in a simple way.

Read More

Simple Christmas Stocking Sewing Tutorial | Lined With Contrasting Cuff

Christmas is just around the corner and what a great time to get out your sewing machine and make some fun holiday decorations. This Christmas stocking sewing tutorial is a very simple project that you can whip up in no time at all. The stocking is lined and has a contrasting cuff.

You can make these stockings out of all kinds of fabric.

WATCH THE VIDEO TUTORIAL HERE

Christmas Stocking Items & Materials Needed

There are two different styles of the stocking. You can make them all one solid color, or piece several types of fabric together to get a patchwork design.

Christmas Stocking Instructions

 

Cutting Out

  • Two of the outer covering and two of the lining pieces.
  • One cuff piece, on the fold where indicated on the pattern. You can also use an upcycled sweater cuff. (The bottom edge of a sweater or the sleeve cuff can be used). If using a sweater cuff, you won’t need to double the fabric, so don’t place the pattern on the fold).
 
  • Loop piece, on the fold where indicated on the pattern

Sewing 

You can use a serger or single needle machine to sew the Christmas stocking. All seams will be 3/8” (usually the edge of your pressure foot) and you will always backstitch at the beginning and end of seams unless directed otherwise.

  • With Right Sides Together (RST), place stocking front to back.  Pin in place.  Sew all the way around, leaving the top open.

 

CUFF:

  • Fold cuff piece in half (RST).  Sew the side seam.
  • Fold the cuff over and in half so the right sides are facing out. (If you want to add lace or trim to the cuff, do it now)
  • With the seam on the left, press in place. Mark the halfway point with a pin, on the right.

PIECED STOCKING:

  • If you want a pieced look, like in the photo on top, follow the directions below. For a more rustic look, you can expose the seams on the outside of the stocking.
  • With (RST) place pieces A & B together matching darts. Pin in place and sew the seam.
  • Open the stocking up and with (RST) place on top of piece C, matching darts. Pin in place and sew the seam.
  • If you want more than three pieces sewn together, like the stocking on the left, you can sew several sweater strips together and then cut a front stocking piece. 
  • Cut out a solid piece for the back.
  • Place these pieces (RST) matching seams and edges, pin in place.  Sew all the way around leaving the top edge open.
  • Place the loop on the stocking lining, centered on the back seam.  Pin in place.
  • Baste the loop onto the stocking. (No need to backstitch) You will be sewing through the lining, stocking, and the loop

SEWING THE CUFF ONTO THE STOCKING

  • Place the cuff inside the stocking, with the RIGHT side facing the stocking.  (If using a sweater cuff, the sweater cuff seam will be facing out and visible).
  • Align the cuff seam with the stocking seam. (There will be 4 layers, 3 if using a sweater cuff)
  • Pin in place.
  • Sew all the way around, through all layers. Stretch and ease sweater cuff as needed.
  • Flip the cuff over. Press seam towards the stocking.
  • Flip the cuff down and Ta-dah…….You are ready to hang your stocking!

There is no limit to the color and fabric combinations that you can do. Make a stocking for each one in the family! 

Have fun sewing. Reach out if you have any questions.

Share:

Facebook
Twitter
Pinterest

Connect:

Unpicking Serger Stitches the EASY WAY

Sewing on a serger/overlock machine is wonderful, but when it comes to unpicking serger stitches, you may be overwhelmed and dreading the whole process. 

I used to feel this way until I learned this slick and easy way to unpick, and I’m going to show you how it’s done. It doesn’t matter how long you’ve been sewing or how good you are at it; there ARE going to be times that you’ll need to UNPICK! However, once you learn this technique, it won’t matter because it is so easy to do.

A serger stitch will either use three or four threads to form the stitch: two looper threads and one or two needle threads. In the photo above, I have used a different thread color for each stitch to show you what it looks like. (four-thread stitch).

Before I learned this trick, I would grab my unpicker and try to unpick each stitch. There were little cut threads everywhere, and it took FOREVER! It was so frustrating!

I seriously can’t believe I went so long sewing on a serger without knowing this little trick. It makes the process quick, and you don’t have to collect and dispose of all the cut threads.

UNPICKING SERGER STITCHES-HOW TO

The only stitches you are going to pull out are the needle threads. The photo above shows a four-needle thread stitch. The RED thread is the left needle stitch, the TAN thread is the right needle stitch, and the blue thread is a looper thread.

1. Take the unpicker, and with the point, grab the red thread, pull it, and cut it. Go down the seam another 1-2 inches and cut the needle thread again. BE CAREFUL NOT TO GRAB THE LOOPER THREADS, this will cause the seam to lock up and the threads will not pull out as easy.

Get ahold of one of the tails of the thread you just cut and ease and pull it out of the fabric. (Sometimes you can do the whole seam in one go). Continue this process until you’ve removed that left needle thread completely.

2. If you are using a four-thread, you’ll need to remove the right needle thread as well.

Finding the right needle thread can be tricky if you use the same thread color as the fabric. (A trick to finding the stitch is to take your unpicker tip and glide it down the little v shape that the looper makes; it will slide right into the right needle stitch.)

It may seem like a lot of work, but trust me, it goes quickly, and you’ll love the results.

3. Here’s the fun part! Once the needle threads are removed, all you need to do is grab the looper threads, give a little pull, and voilà! It will unravel like a dream. There won’t be all those little threads to gather, and you’ll be on your way to re-sewing your seam.

I hope this saves you some grief while sewing. Be sure to comment if you have some great sewing tips for us!

Here are some other sewing blog posts you may be interested in:

OVERLOCK STITCH | NO SERGER NEEDED 

SEWING BY HAND | MOST IMPORTANT STITCHES TO KNOW

Have fun sewing and UNPICKING!

Share:

Facebook
Twitter
Pinterest

Connect:

Picture of Jan Howell

Jan Howell

Whether it’s a new recipe, a fun craft, or some handy tips for your garden and home, I hope to empower and inspire you with skills that you can use to create joy, improved health, and to do it in a simple way.

Read More

Adjustable Face Mask Earloops Tutorial – No Beads

For those of you who are STILL MAKING FACE MASKS, I am going to show you how to make adjustable face mask earloops that are comfortable and don’t require any beads or other hardware. This simple slip knot technique is easy to do and makes adjusting your mask a snap. You can sew these earloops into any of your favorite mask designs.

The secret for comfort is the stretchy fabric strips. You can make your own using upcycled t-shirts, tights, leggings (watch the tutorial HERE) and read this post for some great face mask tie ideas and tips. Or you can simply buy the fabric already cut, stretched, and rolled onto a bolt.

I love this product from FARMYARN. It’s 100% recycled selvage edges from stretchy lycra fabric, and it’s very reasonably priced.

So if you’re making a lot of masks, this is the route I recommend! This stuff can also be used for so many other things and it’s much more comfortable than scratchy elastic! You can purchase it from several places. Here are a few. Amazon, Etsy, and ebay.

Do you have a bunch of tie face masks that you want to convert over to earloops? I have that covered. This post and video tutorial will show you just how to do that. 

ITEMS AND MATERIALS NEEDED

 

I have a Youtube video that you can watch and it really helps if you’re a visual person (like me). You can access the video at the end of the post.

FACE MASK EARLOOPS INSTRUCTIONS

1-Take the small strip and make a small loop at the bottom of the strip.

2-Wrap the long end around the loop and poke through the loop.

3-Pull it through while you’re holding onto the two ends to tighten. (Don’t tighten all the way at this point).

4-Take the long strip and make a knot at one end. (This will keep the strip from pulling through the loop when washing your mask). Thread the other end through the loop you just made and cinch it up by pulling the strip that slides to tighten. (You want it to be able to slide, but also be able to hold in place).

5-Hold the two slip knot ends and cut to even length. 

6-Do the same thing to make a set.

HOW TO SEW FACE MASK EARLOOPS INTO MASK

1-Insert the end of the strip without the knot, into the top side of the mask. (Just below the top seam allowance) Allow the strip to overhang the mask by about 1/2 inch. 

2-Place the two slip knot strips at the bottom side of the mask, just above the seam allowance, and sticking out 1/2 past the edge of the fabric. TIP: Take a strip of masking tape and tape the knotted end the sliding stip to the inside and out of the way, so it won’t get sewn into the seam.

3-Do the same thing for the other earloop set.

4-Proceed with your face mask directions sewing the earloops into the side seams of the mask. Make sure to leave an opening for turning the mask inside out. 

5- Turn inside out, remove the tape, clip seams, and proceed with your face mask instructions.

Play Video Play Video

I hope this was helpful. Let me know if you have any questions.

My other FACE MASK VIDEOS

Happy face mask making!

Share:

Facebook
Twitter
Pinterest

Connect:

OVERLOCK STITCH | No Serger Needed

over lock sewing machine

Do you want a finished overlock stitch for your seams but don’t have a serger? NO WORRIES! I am going to show you how to finish your seams using four different methods and there is NO SERGER NEEDED!

Ideally, it would be nice to have a serger in your sewing tool kit; however, not everyone can afford one or has access to one.

Maybe you’re just getting into sewing and haven’t ventured into the serger world yet.

There are still several ways to get a nice finished edge without using a serger.

I did it for years and these few stitches I’m going to show you work well.

Why do you need to finish seam edges?

If you are sewing on a woven fabric, the seams WILL eventually fray, especially after washing.

You don’t want your seam to come undone after all the work you put into a project.

Depending on what you are sewing, you can use different methods. I will show you several different ways to finish the seam edges.

Even the most basic sewing machines will have these stitches.

Sewing Machine Overlock Stitch Alternatives

ZIGZAG STITCH

This is a stitch when sewn along the edge of the fabric will keep it from fraying.
SEWING MACHINE SETTINGS: Width 4-5, Length 1-2

You can either open the seam and sew each side of the seam allowance separately or sew them together.

This depends on the project you are sewing.

If the pattern has you open the seam and press, sew separately.

This is good for light to medium-weight fabrics. (cotton prints, linen, etc.)

ZIGZAG STITCH with ADDED STRAIGHT STITCH

SEWING MACHINE SETTINGS: Width 0, Length 2.5
For added strength and a more finished look, you can sew down along the inside edge of the zigzag stitch.

You will see this type of seam used on jeans, and projects that with heavier weight fabrics and seams that need more stability.

OVERLOCK STITCH

This is an actual stitch option on your machine. It looks like a zigzag with a straight stitch on the side.

It will take a bit longer than it would with a serger, but it does the job.

THIS STITCH WORKS WELL ON STRETCHY FABRIC! When using this stitch on stretch fabric seams, the seams won’t pop open when pulled.

A narrow and short zigzag stitch will also do the same thing. LOVE IT!

You can use this as your seam stitch and the overlock seam.

However, since the seam is small, your seam allowance will be very small.

You’ll have to take that into consideration and trim the seam allowance first.

Most machines will come with a unique OVERLOCK FOOT. You can see what it looks like in the photo above.

This foot will help guide the fabric so you are sewing right along the edge where you’re supposed to. It works well.

SEWING MACHINE SETTINGS: Width 4-5, Length 1-2

SLANTED LADDER STITCH

This is another sewing stitch option that most machines will have. It is also good for stretchy fabrics.
SEWING MACHINE SETTINGS: Width 4-5, Length 1-2
You can play with the length and width to get the stitch you want.

I recommend getting some scrap fabric and practicing with these stitches.

You’re going to love it.

Please send me a note if you have any questions.

Have fun sewing!

Other posts you may find helpful:

Sewing By Hand, Most Important Stitches to Know

DIY Bias Tape

Have fun sewing and remember to keep it SIMPLE!

Share:

Facebook
Twitter
Pinterest

Connect:

Picture of Jan Howell

Jan Howell

Whether it’s a new recipe, a fun craft, or some handy tips for your garden and home, I hope to empower and inspire you with skills that you can use to create joy, improved health, and to do it in a simple way.

Read More

How to Sew Hexies On-the-Go | English Paper Piecing Tutorial

I have to share with you my new crafting project LOVE, hexies. Yes, I’ve made them before and have even hand pieced a hand quilted hexie flower garden quilt. (That was years ago).

For some reason, the smaller one-inch version has caught my eye I love making them.

We recently went on a road trip and I NEEDED some handwork to do while riding in the car. I figured while I was in the car I would show you how to sew hexies on-the-go. 

One thing I get excited about going on vacation is not only time away, but some time to work on projects like these

Unless I need something to do while watching a movie, or I know I’ll be waiting somewhere for long periods, projects like these get put on the back burner. But WHY?

Little sewing projects like these bring me joy, help me chill and relax, and are very rewarding. 

I guess I’ll have to go on more trips!

So I made sure I had some projects to take with me. (I had three small bins of things to DO: a little sewing, a little crochet, some beading, and my travel watercolor kit).

I never get to them all, but at least I have them with me. Is anyone this crazy?

WHAT ARE HEXIES?

Fabric hexagons (which are affectionately referred to as hexies) are made using a process called English paper piecing.

Each hexagon is made individually by wrapping the fabric around a paper shape, then securing it in place using either stitch basting or glue basting. (The paper will eventually be pulled out).

These hexagon shapes can be used alone or stitched together to form other fun shapes or patterns like flowers.

There really are so many fun ways to put them together.

You can applique them on pillows, quilts, or make a wall hanging. Of course, Pinterest has a few ideas.

This is a GREAT WAY TO USE UP YOUR TREASURED FABRIC SCRAPS!

I made a little HEXIE TRAVEL KIT. Let me show you what‘s in it. 

Hexagons are measured by the length of their sides.

The hexies I show in this tutorial were made using a 1-inch template and is a good size to start with.

HEXIE TRAVEL KIT CONTENTS

  • Pre-cut fabric scraps (cut to 2 ½ inch – 63 mm squares). Use a variety of colors and prints. 
  • Pre-cut hexagon papers you can buy them already made in bulk, or you can make them yourselves. I like to make them using lightweight cardstock. Cutting them by hand can be a little time-consuming, so I made a template on my Silhouette and let the machine cut them out for me. It’s very important that they are cut out accurately and that they are uniform. I have the SVG file available HERE.
  • You can also cut them out manually. I have a great PDF file that was designed so you can easily cut out a bunch at a time using a rotary cutter/ruler, paper cutter, or scissors. You can get the file here. 
  • I like to get a little tin or zip lock bag to put the papers in for easy access.
  • Needle and Thread Some people use a glue stick, but I prefer the simple needle and thread method. Use a milliner type needle size 9-11. (However, any embroidery needle will work just fine). Throw in a spool of white or neutral color thread for basting.
  • Scissors I take my fabric scissors because I like to trim the fabric before sewing. A smaller pair of embroidery scissors are nice if you have a pair.
  • Upcycled Altoid tins to keep single already made hexies, and spare needles.
  • Acrylic template (optional)

HOW TO MAKE A SINGLE HEXIE

Double thread a needle and knot the end. (Don’t get your thread too long, or it will get tangled, about 16 inches after doubled.

Place your hexagon paper on the wrong side of your fabric and centered on the square. Hold the paper in place while you trim the corners to make a 3/8 seam allowance. 

Fold the fabric firmly over the paper on one side and then fold the adjacent side over to form a mitered corner. Take two small stitches over the mitered corner to tack in place. Stitch about ¼ inch from the edge.

Fold the next side over and hold in place while you tack that corner in place.

Repeat until all sides are folded over and sewn in place. Knot and cut the thread.

Store your made hexies in the tin until you are ready to sew them together.

If you are home, it’s nice to press the hexies before sewing them together. However, if you are on-the-road, you can still sew them together and press later.

HOW TO SEW HEXIES TOGETHER

Decide how you want to sew them together. You can make hexie flowers for a Grandma’s Flower Garden quilt, (as shown above) or just start randomly sewing them together if you don’t want a specific pattern.

I’ve done it both ways.

Double thread the needle and knot the end.

Place two hexies right sides together (RST). Using a WHIP STITCH, sew along one side from point to point. Sew small stitches that are about 1/8 inch apart. Catch the top folded edge of fabric only. DO NOT SEW THROUGH PAPER. Small, closely spaced stitches that are sewn straight across the fabric top are best.

When one edge is sewn, secure your stitching with a couple of stitches repeated in the same place, at the end of your hexagon side.

This keeps the stitches tight and the seams (for each side of the hexagon) neatly intact.

Next, fold the hexagons out flat and decide which hexie you want to add next.

When sewing more than one side together, you’ll have to flip the hexie as you sew.

Sew the first side right up to the corner end. Align the next side by folding the other hexie next to it in half (without creasing).

This allows you to line up the edges more easily. Sew that side and repeat the flip. 

While on the road, you can just make up a bunch of single hexies, or if you’re like me, you won’t be able to wait and you’ll want to arrange a flower and sew one together right away. 

Play Video

Seriously, once you make a few hexies you’re going to be hooked! 

I hope this inspires you to make a little travel kit and get sewing, EVEN ON-THE-GO!

Have fun sewing!

Share:

Facebook
Twitter
Pinterest

Connect:

Picture of Jan Howell

Jan Howell

Whether it’s a new recipe, a fun craft, or some handy tips for your garden and home, I hope to empower and inspire you with skills that you can use to create joy, improved health, and to do it in a simple way.

Read More

DIY Face Mask Filter Insert-Reusable and Washable

Do you want a little more protective coverage with your face masks? This DIY face mask filter insert will give you the added protection without a lot of bulk and cost. These filters are EASY TO MAKE, REUSABLE, and WASHABLE. 

I guess we’re not going to get away from the “FACE MASK WEARING SAGA” anytime soon, so we might as well embrace it and make wearing a mask the best experience as possible. Most of the masks that people are making and that are floating around these days are simple, basic two-layer masks. Which are fine for those quick trips in and out of the store. However, what if you need a little more protection and you want comfort as well?

There are so many folks out there who are required to wear a mask for 8 plus hours at a time. Wearing some of these masks with filters feel like you’re going to suffocate, is anyone with me? 

What if your face mask doesn’t have a filter pocket?

No worries! I designed these little filters to fit almost every type of mask. (Pleated Mask, Cinched MasK, No-Sew Mask, Contour Mask). The pleated design allows the filter to open up like a cup and be able to fit comfortably even with a contour mask. (I am working on the finishing touches of my CONTOUR FACE MASK PATTERN right now).

If your face mask does have a filter pocket, you can simply just open up the filter and slide it inside.

Play Video

HOW TO MAKE THE FACE MASK FILTER INSERT

You’ll want to use a high quality 100% cotton fabric. Upcycled high percale cotton sheets and pillowcases work well. Use at least a 400-600 percale. A high-quality cotton quilting fabric will work as well. I like to cut out and make several at a time. They sew up real quick.  

Materials & Items Needed

Download and print the pattern. Cut out using PAPER SCISSORS. 

Make the pleat template by tracing the dimensions onto a piece of heavy cardstock paper or an upcycled cereal box. This template will make the pleating process so much easier! MAKE SURE POINTS ARE ACCURATELY DRAWN ON TEMPLATE, to save any pleat making frustration. 

CUTTING OUT

To cut out two filters at a time, fold the fabric in half twice. (You’ll need to cut out 2 of the pattern piece on the fold).

Place pattern on the fold where indicated and clip in place.

If you don’t have sewing clips, and you don’t want to use pins, simply tape the pattern in place with MASKING TAPE. Yep, I love this stuff. Masking tape comes in real handy for a lot of sewing projects.

Cut out using a rotary cutter or scissors. (If you plan on making a lot of these, I recommend making a template with heavy cardstock or oak tag paper. (recycled cereal box). If using a rotary cutter, GO SLOW AND KEEP YOUR FINGERS OUT OF THE WAY!.

Open the fabric up and take two layers and place them right sides facing out. Line up the edges.

MAKING PLEATS

Take the pleat template and mark the folding points using the tip of a pencil. Just make a tiny dot on the fabric. If using a dark color fabric, you can use a chalk pen. 

Take the template and flip it horizontally with the fold line at the top. Line the top of the template with the bottom set of folding points. Fold the fabric over the template and press in place.

Fold the fabric up until the bottom edge is aligned with the “folding line”. Press in place.

Remove the template and place the top edged of the template on the next set of folding points. Repeat the process until you’ve made all three pleats.

Accuracy is very important, or you will end up with the wrong size of the filter.

 

Once the pleats are made, clip in place.

Now all you have to do is finish the edges using a serger or sewing machine. If you have a serger, use it. If not, you can use a combination of a straight stitch first, and then finish the edges with a wide and short zigzag stitch. (Width 4-5 and 1.5 in length).

Serger method: watch the video and I will show you how to serge around the corners.

Sewing machine method: Using a regular straight stitch, sew all the way around with a ¼ inch seam allowance. Change the setting to a zigzag stitch and sew all the way around. Have the zigzag go all the way to the edge of the fabric. 

Clip threads and you’re finished. 

How do you care for the face mask filter insert? 

It’s easy. Just wash them the same way you do your cloth face masks. (It’s important that you’re washing the face masks frequently). I recommend washing the masks on a regular wash cycle with the rest of your clothing or towels). 

I put my face masks and filters all in a little mesh laundry bag. This keeps them all together and from getting tangled with everything else. These bags also make a nice ‘COLLECTING FACE MASK STATION’. Hang a bag by the door to collect USED MASKS.

I hope you have fun making these little filters and that they bring you a little more comfort knowing you’re getting some more protection. Let me know if you have any questions or concerns when making these.

Have fun sewing, and remember to KEEP IT SIMPLE!

CHECK OUT MY OTHER FACE MASK TUTORIALS HERE

Share:

Facebook
Twitter
Pinterest

Connect:

DIY Cut Off Shorts | 4 Simple Hemming Methods

cutoff short options

Making a pair of DIY cut off shorts is a snap with these 4 simple hemming methods. This is a great way to recycle and save a lot of money! As you know, I like to upcycle and re-purpose items.  Clothing is one of them.

Cutting off a long pair of pants and making a pair of shorts is one of the simplest upcycling projects there is. I am going to show you FOUR different ways to hem your cut-off shorts.

I recommend watching the video tutorial which will walk you through all four of these methods step-by-step!

  • Cut Off & Fray
  • Rolled Hem
  • Cuffed Hem
  • Trouser Hem

What you’ll need to make a pair of cut-off shorts

  • Pair of pants

Pants of all kinds can be used. Jeans are one of my favorite things to cut off. So if you have a pair of jeans that have holes in them, don’t throw them out, make SHORTS!

If you don’t have a pair of pants you want to cut off, thrift stores, consignment shops, and yard sales are great places to pick up an inexpensive pair of pants.

  • Scissors
  • Sewing machine (optional)
  • Pins
  • Needle & Thread (optional)
  • Chalk pen (optional)
  • Seam gauge
  • Iron

How long do you want your cut-off shorts?

Whichever way you choose to hem your cut-offs; the first thing you’ll need to do is decide HOW LONG YOU WANT THEM.

The easiest way is to take a pair of shorts that you already have and like the length and use them as a template.  Or you can simply try the pants on and carefully apply a straight pin at the DESIRED LENGTH. DO NOT CUT OFF AT THIS POINT!

Once you’ve decided how long you want your shorts, it’s time to decide how you want to finish the edge.

If you are using an existing pair of shorts as a template, simply lay the shorts on top of the long pair of pants you are cutting off. Line up the CROTCH SEAM, NOT THE WAISTLINE. (Some pants have a longer waist height than others). Make sure the waist is lined up horizontally so you get an even cut.

Depending on what hem style you are using, you’ll either be cutting off at the DESIRED LENGTH or ADDING TO THE LENGTH.

CUT OFF & FRAY – Cut off at that length.

ROLLED HEM  –  Add ¾ inch

CUFFED HEM  – Add 2 inches

TROUSER HEM – Add 1 3/8 INCHES

1  Cut Off & Fray

The “cut off & fray method” is the simplest and quickest way to finish a pair of shorts.

  1. Cut off one pant leg at the DESIRED LENGTH.
  2. Fold the pants in half and line up the top of the waist.
  3. Use the already cut pant leg as a guide to cut off the other side.

You can leave the fabric unfinished and just the fabric fray out. I recommend sewing around the leg with a straight stitch ¼ – ½ inch from the cut edge. This will keep the fray to a minimum. This is a preference only.

2  Rolled Hem

Using a seam gauge, measure ¾ inch from the DESIRED LENGTH MARK. Make sure the top of the waist is even and straight. Use a chalk pen or disappearing ink pen and draw a cutting line.

Cut off one pant leg.

Fold the pants in half and line up the top of the waist.

Use the already cut pant leg as a guide to cut off the other side.

Fold the edge up 3/8 inch and press. Roll up another 3/8 and press.

Pin in place.

Topstitch just inside the fold all the way around, starting at the inner thigh seam. Backstitch at the beginning and end of the seam.

Repeat on the other pant leg. Finished cut edge by using a serger, or the zigzag stitch of a single needle machine.

Fold the edge up, wrong sides together, 3/8 inch, and press. Roll up another 3/8 and press.

Pin in place.

Finish cut edge by using a serger, or the zigzag stitch of a single needle machine.

Fold the edge up, wrong sides together, 3/8 inch, and press. Roll up another 3/8 and press.

Pin in place

Tack the cuff in place so it does not come undone while laundering. To do this, simply sew along the side seams of the cuff using the sewing machine or you can do this by hand.

4 Trouser Hem

This hemming method is a good one to use if you want a more finished look. Dress pants and trousers with a lighter weight fabric work well.

  1. Using a seam gauge, measure 1 3/8 inches from the DESIRED LENGTH MARK. Make sure the top of the waist is even and straight. Using a chalk pen or disappearing ink pen and draw a cutting line.
  2. Cut off one pant leg.
  3. Fold the pants in half and line up the top of the waist.
  4. Use the already cut pant leg as a guide to cut off the other side.

Fold the cut edge up 3/8 inch and press.

Now fold another 1 inch. Press and pin in place.

There are a few ways to finish this hem. You can topstitch with a single or double stitch or you can use the BLIND HEM STITCH. The blind hem stitch can be done by hand or by using the sewing machine. You can watch the blind hem video tutorial HERE.

There you have it; four different ways to make a pair of cut-off shorts from an upcycled pair of pants. It’s pretty simple and straightforward. Let me know if you have any questions.

Share:

Facebook
Twitter
Pinterest

Connect:

Picture of Jan Howell

Jan Howell

Whether it’s a new recipe, a fun craft, or some handy tips for your garden and home, I hope to empower and inspire you with skills that you can use to create joy, improved health, and to do it in a simple way.

Read More

Upcycled Denim Patchwork Quilt

(UPDATED 2/23/23)

Have you ever slept under a denim patchwork quilt? There is nothing better! There is just something about the heaviness of the denim and the coziness of a soft flannel fabric that just seems to tuck you in and comfort you. In this tutorial, I am going to show you how easy it is to make a quilt using upcycled denim jeans.

My sister-in-law gave my husband a denim patchwork quilt many years ago and it has been a family favorite. We use it to throw it on the lawn for a picnic, watching fireworks, or just add some warmth to our bed on a cold winter’s night.

denim patchwork quilt

I have been saving jeans for many years with the intention of making each one of my kids an Upcycled Denim Patchwork Quilt. I made my oldest son a denim quilt when he graduated from high school and planned on doing the same for the other two kids.

Last Christmas I made another quilt for my youngest son and now it’s time to make one for my daughter. So I’m cutting out denim squares again.

You can watch PART ONE of a 3 part series below.

QUEEN SIZE QUILT: Cut out 132 squares. 

FULL/PICNIC SIZE:  Cut out 108 squares.

One night my husband, bless his heart, helped me cut. I opened up the jeans and marked them, and he cut. We had quite the process going. (He is a manufacturing engineer)!

A FEW TIPS FOR CUTTING OUT YOUR SQUARES.

Denim Patchwork Quilt Materials & Items Needed

  • upcycled jeans/corduroy
  • scissors
  • scrap paper
  • oaktag paper or upcycled cereal box
  • pen/pencil
  • sticky notes/scrap paper
  • pins
  • sewing machine/serger
  • optional yarn for tying the quilt.

1-  MAKE A TEMPLATE of the size square you want.

I found about the biggest square you can get out of most jeans’ pant legs was a 8 x 8-inch square. You could always make this smaller if you wanted. I like to use oak tag paper. Oak Tag is similar to poster board, except it is thicker and holds up better. You will see it used a lot in the packaging of clothing, and other items. You can also use recycled cereal boxes.

I always save it to use on pattern templates, stencils, and of course VALENTINES!

2-  OPEN UP THE PANTS 

 

Here is a video showing how to deconstruct a pair of jeans to make it easier for cutting out these squares.

3-  TRACE AROUND TEMPLATE using a pen.

You can include the seam of the pants in one square if needed. This actually gives a little character anyway. To optimize fabric usage, butt up the edges of the square whenever possible.

Include a few pockets in your quilt, especially if you have a pocket with a good tag. Make sure you have enough fabric around the pocket (3/8 inch) for sewing.

denim patchwork quilt4-  COUNT OUT SQUARES BY TENS and place a scrap piece of paper with the number of squares up to that point written on it, between the layers.

(That way you will not waste time counting over and over again to see how many squares you have).

denim patchwork quiltDouble/queen-size quilt: 132 squares. Make rows of 11 squares x 12 rows.

Full/Picnic-size quilt: 108 squares. Make rows of 9 x 12 rows.

denim quiltLay out the squares in rows on the floor so you can get a visual of what it will look like. Adjust as you want.

Start stacking the rows with the top left square on the top.

MARK THE ROWS WITH A STICKY NOTE PINNED TO THE TOP OF THE ROW.

SEWING the denim patchwork QUILT TOP TOGETHER

    1. Place two squares  Right Sides Together (RST) and sew a seam using a 3/8 seam allowance. I used my serger which works really well if you have one. No worries if you don’t have a serger.
    2. Open the two squares up and place another square (RST) and sew that seam.  Continue in this manner until you have 11/9  squares sewn together in a long strip.  *Alternate colors and shades of denim to give it some character.denim patchwork quilt
    3. MARK THE TOP OF THE STRIP WITH THE STICKY LABEL. (ROW 1, ETC.)
    4. Sew 12 strips. denim patchwork quilt
    5. Now to join the strips:  Place row 1 and row 2  (RST) and sew all the way down one edge of the strip.  (Take time to line up the seams as you go). Flip one row seam allowance up and the other down to interlocking the seams. (I find this is the best way to get the seams lined up)
    6. Open the two strips up and place strip 3 on the two already sewn together.  Sew that strip on.  Now you have three strips sewn together.  Add one more strip making a section of 4 rows of 11/9.denim quilt foursome
    7. Set that foursome aside and build another foursome in the same manner, until you have 4 sets of 4.
    8. Now to join them all together, place two of the foursomes (RST) and sew.  Do that again with the other two foursomes.

This gets a little bulky sewing it all together, just take your time and give yourself some room around your sewing machine.

Denim Patchwork Quilt Back

Instead of buying about 6 yards of fabric and having to piece it together, I have found buying a flannel sheet set is cheaper and you usually get a better quality fabric. Don’t settle for a thin piece of flannel, as you will want it to be durable.

 

I found this Eddi Bauer queen-size sheet set at Burlington Coat Factory for around $39.00. It came with a flat and fitted sheet and two pillowcases. My son was thrilled to have a new bottom sheet and some matching pillowcases. It was a good thick flannel as well.

To Tie The Denim Patchwork Quilt

Watch this video to see how to tie a quilt using quilting frames and without quilting frames.

Choose a matching color of yarn to tie the quilt with.

Throw it on your quilting frames and tie it away.

I tied this quilt at the corners and one in the center. There is nothing better than an afternoon with a friend, sitting around chatting while you tie a quilt. That is about how long it took the two of us, 2 1/2 hours. It was so enjoyable and relaxing to tie the quilt!

Binding The Quilt

Binding quilts by hand is so enjoyable to me. I am not sure why? There is just something about it. It takes a bit longer, but I think it looks much nicer and is good therapy.

You can use the sewing machine to bind it if you like.

I usually leave about an inch of flannel around the edge. Fold the flannel edge over 1/2 inch and roll again over the denim top about a 1/2 inch and sew in place.

I like to personalize my quilts with some kind of endearing tag.

Want some other upcycled jeans project ideas? Check out this post.

Have fun sewing!

 

Share:

Facebook
Twitter
Pinterest

Connect:

Picture of Jan Howell

Jan Howell

Whether it’s a new recipe, a fun craft, or some handy tips for your garden and home, I hope to empower and inspire you with skills that you can use to create joy, improved health, and to do it in a simple way.

Read More

FACE MASK Minimal Sewing Method | It’s A Cinch

Making a face mask just got even easier! This DIY face mask minimal sewing method can be made either by a sewing machine or by hand. It’s really a cinch, literally! Instead of pleating, I teach you how to create a comfortable fitting face mask using a new CINCHING METHOD. 

This adult face mask has four protective layers and an easy to access filter pocket that is accessed from the bottom of the mask, out of the way from your mouth. The ties are made from upcycled t-shirts which makes this mask comfortable to wear. I have given the measurements for a TEEN AND CHILD MASK as well.

 

Recycle an old t-shirt or use a cotton piece of fabric to make your mask. I will demonstrate the sewing machine and hand sewing method in this tutorial.

Face Mask Minimal Sewing Method Materials and Items Needed

  • FABRIC (14.91 cm) cotton fabric, knit fabric, or upcycled t-shirts (cut 16 ½  x 16 ½  inch)
  • SCISSORS/ROTARY CUTTER (OPTIONAL)
  • PINS/CLIPS (OPTIONAL) I LOVE THESE FABRIC CLIPS!
  • RULER/SEAM GAUGE
  • SEWING MACHINE (OPTIONAL-can be sewn by hand)
  • BAG TWIST TIES,  CRAFT PIPE CLEANERS (If using craft pipe cleaners, cut to 4 inch
  • IRON
  • UPCYCLED T-SHIRT/ OR KNIT FABRIC (for the mask ties)
  • Safety Pin
  • Needle & Thread, if sewing by hand.

Cutting Out Mask

Cut the fabric to the correct measurement for the size.

  • ADULT: Fabric 16.5 x 16.5 inches (14.91 x 14.91. cm)
  • TEEN: Fabric 15.5 x 15.5 inches (39.7 x 39.7cm) 
  • CHILD: Fabric 14.5 x 14.5 inches (36.83 cm)

Upcycled T-Shirt

Cut off the bottom 16.5 inches of the shirt, LEAVE THE HEM INTACT!

Cut the same width (16.5 wide).

Woven Fabric

Cut a piece of fabric 16.5 x 16.5 inches.

Cutting Out Ties

The beauty of knit fabric is that it doesn’t fray, and when pulled it will curl. You may be asking why do we want it to curl? When it curls it creates a little tube, like an enclosed tie, but you don’t have to sew it to keep it that way like you would a woven fabric.

If you don’t have any knit fabric or T-shirts to make ties with, I found a great resource where you can purchase this stuff already made. It’s called “FARMYARN”. This yarn is made from recycled lycra fabric that is REALLY stretchy and durable. It’s like elastic and can be used in so many ways ie: FACE MASKS! You can read more about it and buy it HERE. 

Read the face mask tie tutorial HERE.

Cut two strips either crosswise or lengthwise 1 inch wide. (2.5) cm

Cutting along the bottom of a t-shirt, the fabric will curl and expose the wrong side of the fabric.

 (Which doesn’t matter if using a plain color, preference only).

But if you want the right side of the fabric exposed, cut the shirt lengthwise.

Pull the strips to stretch and curl the fabric.

You can either have the ties tie over the head and behind the neck, or you can make it so you have a continuous permanent loop behind your neck. (That way you don’t have to tie it every time) I personally just like regular ties.

 CUT TWO STRIPS 32 INCHES (58.42 cm) long

CONTINUOUS STRIP  33 INCHES (83.82 cm) long

If you don’t have a strip long enough, you can sew two pieces together.

Sewing Instructions

Fold the fabric in half with Right Sides Together (RST).

(T-Shirt fabric, have the hem edge be on the side).

Using a ¼ inch seam allowance, sew along the long unfinished edge using a straight stitch or sew by hand USING A RUNNING STITCH. Backstitch at the beginning and end of all seams.

 

Turn inside out.

WOVEN FABRIC: Fold unfinished edges under ¼ inch and press in place. Do this on both sides.

T SHIRT/KNIT FABRIC: Skip this step. (Knit fabric will not fray).

Fold WRONG SIDES TOGETHER making a shorter tube.

Line up pressed edges of the two layers.

WOVEN FABRIC: Sew the 2 layers together, topstitching close to the edge.

You will start at one point and sew around until you meet the starting point (Sewing around the tube). Backstitch.

T-SHIRT/KNIT FABRIC: Skip this step

Applying Nose Wire

Take the twist tie or pipe cleaner and insert it between the two FOLDED EDGES of the doubled tube.

(Opposite of where you just topstitched)

(If using a pipe cleaner, barely fold the ends under and crimp in place. This will keep the sharp point from poking through the fabric!).

Center it side to side and down ¼ inch from the top edge. The wire will be sandwiched between the two layers. Clamp or pin in place.

Make a casing for the wire so it stays in place when washing the mask.

If sewing by hand, use a simple running stitch.

Feel with your fingers where the edge of the wire is and start stitching down from the top a few stitches. (You will be sewing through all four layers of fabric).  Leave your needle in and lift up presser foot and pivot fabric.

Sew along the bottom of the wire to the other edge of the wire (feeling with your fingers where that is).

Pivot and sew back up to the top edge. Leave your needle in and pivot again to sew along the top edge. You will have sewn a little box around the nose wire.

Sewing Tie Casings

Sew down the sides of the mask ½ inch from the edge.

If sewing by hand, you can just use a simple running stitch.

Backstitch at the beginning and end of the seam.

Inserting Mask Ties

Attach the safety pin to the end of the tie.

CONTINUOUS TIE:

Thread the tie into the casing starting at the top of the mask. Pull out and continue threading the other side from the bottom up to the top.

REGULAR DOUBLE TIE:

Thread each tie into the casing.

 

Cinching the sides of mask to gather.

No Pleats, Yea!

CONTINUOUS  TIES:

Decide how tight you want the neckband to be by trying the mask on.  Once you’ve situated it and it feels tight enough, clamp in place. Remove mask.

Take the ends of the ties and hold them together. Pull to gather each side of the mask until the gathered section measures 4 inches.

Repeat on the other side.

REGULAR DOUBLE TIES:

Take the ends of the ties and hold together. Cinch the fabric to gather evenly until the gathered fabric area measures 4 inches. CLAMP IN PLACE OR PIN IN PLACE.

Tacking down ties

Sew the ties in place by sewing back and forth over the end of the casings, making sure to catch the ties underneath.

Repeat on both sides of mask. (This can be done by hand or by sewing machine).

Mask Care:

Masks can be washed and dried with other clothing.

See my other face mask tutorials HERE.

 

Play Video
Play Video

See my other face mask tutorials HERE.

Share:

Facebook
Twitter
Pinterest

Connect:

SEWING BY HAND | Most Important Stitches to Know

SEWING BY HAND | Most Important Stitches to Know

 

Knowing how to sew these 3 basic stitches will allow you to mend and create items that you might not be able to because you don’t have a sewing machine.

Although there are several other hand sewing stitches and techniques, I will only show you the basting or running stitch, the stretch stitch or herringbone stitch, and the backstitch.

Items Needed:

  • All-purpose thread
  • Scissors
  • Needle

(I recommend getting a variety of needles to have handy for different projects). For basic hand sewing, use a sharp or a milliner. You can get more technical with eye size and point types, but choose a mid-sized one for now.

  • Thimble (optional)
  • Needle threader (optional)

I recommend purchasing or making your own little sewing kit. This one comes with everything you’ll need, including my favorite fabric clips and small scissors.

It comes in several thread colors for those small mending projects.

Threading the needle

You can either use a single or double thread. I use a double thread for most projects. Please don’t get the thread too long, or it may be prone to tangling while sewing.

A good length is around 16 inches after doubling.

 

Knotting the thread

Unless you are just basting, each seam will need to start and end with an anchor stitch.

This is where you knot the thread so it will not come undone. You can make a knot at the end of your thread for most projects.

To do this, take the ends of the thread and wrap them around your pointer finger, then roll the thread between your fingers. Gently pull the thread, and it will create a little knot.

Then you’re ready to begin. To make a knot at the end of the seam, pull the needle to the backside and take a tiny stitch, leaving a little loop.

Wrap the needle around the loop once and pull the thread. This will knot the thread.

You can use an anchor stitch if you don’t want the bulk of a bunch of knots when you’re sewing by hand.

Take a tiny stitch and then another little stitch right by it. Then start your stitching. You can end a seam the same way.

SEWING BY HAND stitches that are important to know

 

Basting stitch/Running Stitch

The basting stitch/running stitch is excellent for temporarily holding pieces of fabric together or for quick seams that don’t need to be sturdy.

This stitch can also gather fabric for ruffles or easing in.

Take the needle in and out of the fabric with ¼ to ½ inch long stitches.

Take several stitches at a time by popping the needle in and out of the fabric before pulling through.

Stretch Stitch/Herringbone Stitch

This stitch has several names. I like to call it a hand stretch stitch because it works so well with stretchy fabrics. (The seam won’t pop and break like a straight stitch will when sewn on knit fabrics).

You can also use it for hemming and decorative embroidery and quilt making.

 

Drawing two horizontal lines with a washable pencil or chalk will help as a guide while sewing by hand.

Work the stitch from left to right, making little back stitches and crossing over to the other line at a diagonal.

 

Backstitch

The backstitch is one of the strongest, most adaptable stitches.

It mimics the straight stitch you would see on a sewing machine and is useful for simple mending jobs and other small projects. It is also useful if you plan on sewing your own clothing by hand.

 

To keep your seam as straight and tidy as possible, it’s helpful to mark the stitching line with a thin pencil line. You can use a sharp pencil, chalk pen, or washable ink.

On straight seams, use a ruler.

 

Push the needle into the fabric where you want to start the seam.

Bring the needle back through both layers of fabric just in front of the previous stitch.

Push the needle back into the fabric between where the needle came in and out of the fabric to create the first stitch.

These stitches can touch each other, as you see here, or you can space them a little farther apart.

 

Continue this pattern until you are at the end of the seam. Push the needle to the back side and take your anchor stitch and knot in place.

 

Pin your project to a firm bolster or pillow. This will allow you to sew a lot faster.

I hope this makes sewing by hand less intimidating and helps you understand how to use these three basic stitches.

 

Have fun sewing!

Share:

Facebook
Twitter
Pinterest

Connect:

Simplified FACE MASK / No Elastic / Filter Pocket / Upcycled T-Shirt Ties

As you most likely have heard, face masks are in huge demand right now, as we experience this COVID-19 pandemic. There is a BIG movement going on with crafters making and donating homemade masks. Forbes even wrote an article calling all people who sew to help with the face mask shortage.

However, before you go crazy and start mass-producing a bunch of masks, I think it’s important that you get informed on the mask-wearing facts. I know there is A LOT controversy over their effectiveness and use, but from my research here are a few resources that I think are reliable.

This HUFFPOST article is loaded with links to who should and should not wear a mask, how effective homemade masks are and they even recommend some mask patterns. The World Health Organization has some good videos showing when to use a mask and other tips to protect against the coronavirus.

The purpose of this post is not to educate about the COVID-19 virus, but to show you how easy it is to make a simplified face mask for yourself, your family or serve the community by making and donating them, if you choose. 

Get informed!

I encourage you to be informed. Call your local hospitals, healthcare facilities, and see what their needs are. If they are taking homemade masks and could use them, by all means, get out your sewing machines and your fabric stash and get your little sewing fingers moving!!!!! 

I’m sure you’ve seen a ton of different styles and patterns of masks out there and most of them call for elastic. If you’ve tried to buy elastic lately, you’ll find that most stores are out of stock. NO WORRIES! You can make this face mask without elastic using an upcycled t-shirt!

This face mask has

  • No Elastic
  • A Filter Pocket
  • Wire Nose Clamp
  • Upcycled T-Shirt Ties

 

Material and Items Needed

YOU CAN GET THE FULL PRINTABLE TUTORIAL AND PATTERN HERE.

If you do not sew and would like to purchase a face mask already made, I have them in my Etsy shop HERE.

If you don’t have any knit fabric or T-shirts to make ties with, I found a great resource where you can purchase this stuff already made. It’s called “FARMYARN”. This yarn is made from recycled lycra fabric that is REALLY stretchy and durable. It’s like elastic and can be used in so many ways ie: FACE MASKS! You can read more about it and buy it HERE. 

INSTRUCTIONS

1- Cutting Out Face Mask

ADULT: Fabric 14 1/2 inches x 8 inches (36.8 cm x 20.3 cm).  
TEEN: Fabric 13 3/4 inches x 7 inches 
CHILD: Fabric 13 inches x 6 inches

2- Cutting Out Ties

The beauty of knit fabric, is that it doesn’t fray, and when pulled it will curl. You may be asking why do we want it to curl? When it curls it creates a little tube, like an enclosed tie, but you don’t have to sew it to keep it that way like you would a woven fabric.

Cut two strips either crosswise or lengthwise 1 inch wide. (2.5) cm

Cutting along the bottom of a t-shirt, the fabric will curl and expose the wrong side of the fabric. (Which doesn’t matter if using a plain color, preference only). But if you want the right side of the fabric exposed, cut the shirt lengthwise as shown in the diagram above.

Pull the strips to stretch and curl the fabric.

Cut ties to 15 inches (38.1) cm

3-  Finish the edges of the short sides of the mask piece using a serger or zigzag stitch.

4-  Place the right sides together of the SHORT ENDS of the mask piece.

ADULT: Measure 1 ½ inches from both sides and mark with a pin.
TEEN: Measure 1 inch from edges
CHILD: Measure 3/4 inch from edges.

5-  Using a straight stitch, sew from the edge to the pin.

Backstitch. Sew the other end the same way.

 

6- Open up seam and press.

 

7- Topstitch along both sides of the seam.

(It’s easiest to keep the wrong side out and sew inside the tube you just made).

 

8-  Place seam 1/2 inch from the top fold

Press.

9- Sewing the Face mask ties

Take the ties and place the ends in the corners of the mask, making sure they butt up against the fold. Allow the ends to stick out a bit to make sure you are catching them in the seam. Pin or clamp in place. Pull the tie ends out of the hole to keep them out of your way.

I love these little fabric clamps, but pins work just fine.

 

Sew down the sides of the mask, backstitching at the beginning and end of the seam.

Clip corners.

10- Turn inside out.

Poke out the corners and press.

 

 

11- Mark and sew pleats

Lay the pleat guide along the edge of the mask and place pins in to mark folding points. There should be 6 pins on each side, as indicated in the photo above.

Fold the top pin down to meet the second pin. Clip fold in place using the fabric pins or pin in place. Continue this process until all three pleats have been formed.

If you are making a lot of these masks after a while you won’t need to measure and pin, you’ll be able to just eyeball it. 

 

Repeat this on the other side. Press pleats in place.

 

 

12-Top stitch along the side edges of the mask.

First pass sew close 1/4 inch from the edge, and the second pass sew close to the edge.

13- Wire Nose Clamp

Take the pipe cleaner or wire that you are using and insert it through the hole in the back of the mask. Align it at the TOP of the mask and center. Make sure it is against the folded edge of the mask.

 

Sew along the top edge at 1/2 inch seam allowance to create a casing for the wire.

Sew along the bottom edge as well to reinforce and stabilize the mask. 

Play Video

There you have it.

 

Keep in mind that these masks MAY not prevent us from contracting Covid-19, but they can act as a physical reminder for us to keep our hands away from our face, and when it comes down to it, they may be better than nothing as a protective barrier.

If you think that a handmade mask cannot be used, think again. Even the Centers for Disease Control and Prevention (CDC) has a place for them — in times of crisis, like the one we are in right now. On the CDC page: Strategies for Optimizing the Supply of Facemasks, they explain that as a last resort, a homemade mask is acceptable.

NEED A GENUINE N95 Respirator Mask Reusable, (FDA Registered) Face Mask?

Check out this reputable source

Take care my dear friends! We are all in this together! 

Sending love to all of you!

Other posts you may be interested in

 

 

Share:

Facebook
Twitter
Pinterest

Connect:

DIY Lavender EYE PILLOW | Easy Sewing Tutorial

There is nothing better than a soothing lavender eye pillow when you’re feeling stressed to take away the tension. This easy to follow DIY eye pillow tutorial will guide you through a quick and easy project that you can make in 10 minutes or less. Even a beginner seamstress can handle this!

I love using an eye pillow when

  • I take a nap
  • at the end of my yoga practice for savasana
  • and when I have a sinus headache. (I put it in the freezer to get it cold and then put it over my eyes).

What I love about this eye pillow it that it has a removable slip cover that you can wash, and the dried lavender stays fragrant for years.

What else is a lavender eye pillow good for?

  • Shields the eyes from light and visual stimulus. Covering the eyes blocks out glaring light, and blocks any visual stimulus that may keep your mind racing.
  • Relieves tension and eye strain.  Most people think the an eye pillow is just to block out the light, but the light weight of the flax seeds ensures the perfect amount of acupressure to release tension from the forehead, cheekbones, temples, neck and even the shoulders. Some yoga scholars also claim that the light pressure on the eyes sends a neurological signal to the brain that facilitates  whole body relaxation.
  • Calms and rests the mind. 

Here is a little article that talks about the oculocardiac reflex in the eyes that can serve as a very powerful doorway to the relaxation response. Now I know even a little more about the “why” of these wonderful eye pillows. (I’m all about the why)!

You can read more about the other benefits in one of my previous posts

 Materials & Items Needed

Cutting Out Inner Bag

Cut ONE strip of fabric 9 x 9 inches. (22.86 cm)

Cutting Out Slipcover

Cut ONE strip of fabric 5 x 20.5 inches. (12.7 x 52.07 cm)

Sewing Instructions Inner Bag

Fold fabric in half with right sides together.

Pin in place and sew along the bottom and side using a ¼ inch seam allowance.

(Leave one short side open). Turn inside out and press.

Make a paper funnel using a standard piece of paper. Simply roll in the sides and adjust the edges to form a cone. Adjust it so there is about a 1/2 inch opening and tape it in place.

Fill with approximately 1 cup rice, flax seeds, millet, or buckwheat. (My favorite are flax seeds).

Add 1/4 cup lavender buds. (optional). Oh, baby, this makes them smell so yummy! If you don’t have access to lavender buds, you and simply place a few drops of lavender essential oil on the outer cover, here and there. 

 

Fold the open end under ½ inch to the inside and sew close to the edge.

Sewing Instructions Slip Cover

Hem the short ends of the fabric by using a rolled hem method. (Folding under ¼ and then another ¼ inch).

Press and topstitch in place. Backstitch at the beginning and end of seam.

With Right Sides Together, fold left side over 1 ½ inches.

Fold the right side over so the edge is about ½ inch from the left fold.  Press and pin in place.

If you want to add a tag, this is when to do it. Stick the tag just inside the right folded edge. Let the tag hang out a bit, as to make sure to catch it in the seam.

Sew along the top and bottom of the slipcover, backstitching at the beginning and end of your seam. Add a tag in the top right corner. (Optional) If you have a serger, use it. If you don’t no worries. However, you are using a fabric that frays easily, use a zig-zag stitch to finish the edge of the seam allowance. You can do this by simply sewing a zigzag stitch down the seam.

Clip corners, turn inside out. Poke corners out and press. You can do this by simply sewing a zigzag stitch down the seam.

Slip the inner bag inside the slipcover.

EYE PILLOW CARE: 

Outer slipcover can be machine washed and dried. DO NOT WASH INNER EYE PILLOW BAG! To refresh lavender fragrance, simply squeeze bag contents to activate lavender.

Play Video

Remember self-care is critical in your wellbeing! Enjoy a little YOU time!

Have fun sewing!

 

Share:

Facebook
Twitter
Pinterest

Connect:

Picture of Jan Howell

Jan Howell

Whether it’s a new recipe, a fun craft, or some handy tips for your garden and home, I hope to empower and inspire you with skills that you can use to create joy, improved health, and to do it in a simple way.

Read More

DIY Fabric Carrots Sewing Tutorial

DIY fabric carrots

It is almost Easter time, and what a great time to get out your sweater stash and make SWEATER carrots.

Yep, fabric CARROTS! What can’t you make out of upcycled sweaters? Now, if you are short on ORANGE SWEATERS or don’t have any felted orange sweaters, these work great with orange fleece and knits.

These make really fun Easter gifts and party favors.

****Carrots are NOT recommended for baby toys! 

Cute to display with a SWEATER BUNNY! Bunny & Bear pattern located in my shop.

Fabric carrots items needed:

  • Orange fabric (felted sweaters, fleece, or knit). If using felted sweaters, ensure they are not too thick and have a little stretch.
  • Scissors
  • Pins
  • Carrot pattern template (download here)

 

Fold the fabric over in a diagonal shape and place the pattern edge on the fold where indicated.

Cut out.

Place Right Sides Together (RST) and sew the side seam with a 1/4 inch seam allowance.

Turn inside out and poke the tip of the carrot out with some kind of point tool, being careful not to poke through the fabric.

To make the fabric carrot greens:

Using the pattern template, cut out 3-4 leaf squares. Sew the wire onto the middle of the leaf using a zigzag stitch. (template will show how far down to place the wire).

 

Cut little slits in the leaf all around the side and top of square.

Round off the top corners with your scissors.

Fluff the leaf. Repeat to make however many stems you want.

 

Start filling the carrot with stuffing, a little amount at a time.

Using something to push it down. I find the pokey tool slips through the stuffing and doesn’t push it down. (I found that using the tip of my scissors works well)

 

Continue to fill the sweater carrot with stuffing until it is complete.

 

Double thread a LONG needle with either orange, brown, or green thread.

(I like to use either brown or green to give the dimples in the carrot some contrast). Your preference.

 

Start stitching so the knot is on the INSIDE.

Take basting stitches all the way around the top of the carrot.

 

End stitching with the thread on the OUTSIDE.

Do not KNOT the thread yet.

Take the stems and stick them down the center of the carrot into the stuffing, to the length you want them.

 

Now pull the stitching to gather the top of the carrot.

Stuff the fabric seam allowance into the carrot as you put the thread.

Now stitch another row or two around the carrot to close the top tightly around the stems.

Take a little stitch where the thread comes out and knot.

(To make a knot, take a small stitch and pull the thread to make a little loop, then wrap the thread around the needle a few times and gently pull to create a knot.

Stick the needle back into the carrot right where the knot is and pull out where you want to make the first dimple.

To make little dimples in the sweater carrot:

Pull the needle out where you want the dimple to start and take a big stitch (these stitches can be small or even wrap around the carrot).

These dimples give the carrot its character and shape. I like to take two stitches in the same place to reinforce the stitch and give it more shape.

Stick the needle down into where you want another dimple to be. Add as many as you want.

 

Knot the thread again.

Now stick the needle back in where the thread comes out. Poke out somewhere and clip the thread.

Ta dah! 

Aren’t they cute little fellas?

 

The pattern template comes with two different sizes. Make up a bunch of sizes and some with different shades of orange.

 

Share:

Facebook
Twitter
Pinterest

Connect:

Picture of Jan Howell

Jan Howell

Whether it’s a new recipe, a fun craft, or some handy tips for your garden and home, I hope to empower and inspire you with skills that you can use to create joy, improved health, and to do it in a simple way.

Read More

DIY Ironing Board Cover: Sewing Tutorial

mini ironing board cover DIY

Does your ironing board cover have stains, rips, or is it just looking cruddy?  Perhaps it’s time to replace it, and I’m going to show you how to easily make your own!

It’s an easy sewing project that you can make in no time at all.

Not only will you save money by making your own cover, but you can customize it by choosing the fabric.

There are so many options. I will demonstrate on a mini ironing board, but you can do the same thing with a full-size ironing board. (You will obviously need more fabric, elastic, and bias tape to cover a full-size board).

By the way, I love my little mini ironing board! It is great because there are so many little ironing projects (my sewing projects) that don’t require the big one.

I can just throw it on my countertop and go to town. It saves so much room and stores away really nicely. The legs can fold down. This is the one I prefer.

It comes with a cover, but I have already replaced mine due to iron water stains. However, making a new cover is NOT a big deal if you know how. 🙂

If you are a visual learner, the short video tutorial will show you the process step by step and give extra bonus tips. Check it out below.

Ironing board cover items and materials needed

Instructions

1 – Make a pattern

Place the board wrong side up on top of the material you are using for the pattern (paper or cloth). 

Using a seam gauge or measuring tape, measure 1 ½ inches away from the edge of the board and mark with a pencil or chalk.

Connect markings to create an outline. Cut out along the line.

2 – Save the pattern in a marked envelope for later use.

This means you don’t have to trace the board every time you want a new one.

3 – Take the pattern and place it on top of the fabric you’re using to make the cover.

Pin in place and cut out.

If you need a new pad, cut one out using a piece of cotton batting or thin foam. (You may want to double the batting.

4 – Apply the bias tape.

With the right side of the fabric facing up, apply the bias tape to the edge of the fabric.

Start at the bottom middle of the board. Line up edges and pin in place. Curve the tape around the corners.

When you get to the beginning, overlap the bias tape by 1 inch and cut.

Fold the edge of the bias tape on the bottom up by ½ inch and place the other end over the top. (This is where you will be inserting the elastic.)

5 – Sew the bias tape onto the cover.

Start at the overlapped tape and sew all the way around. Sew in the pre-pressed fold of the bias tape close to the edge.

Backstitch at the beginning and end of the seam.

 

6 – Fold the bias tape over and topstitch, just inside the fold, all the way around.

 

7 – Apply the safety pin to the end of the elastic.

 

 

8 – Apply the safety pin to the end of the elastic.

9 – Insert a safety pin into the little hole you created with bias tape and thread all the way around, pulling as you go.

(Make sure you don’t pull too much and lose the end of the elastic). I like to pin the end when I start getting close to the end of the elastic.

 

10 – Place the cover onto the ironing board and adjust the elastic to fit.

Overlap elastic to fit and pin in place.

 

11 – Sew ends of elastic in place with the sewing machine and cut off extra elastic.

 

12 – Even out the fabric and elastic.

 

13-Remove cover and topstitch folded ends of the bias tape to keep it from fraying when washed.

 

There you have it, a nice new, clean, and stylish ironing board cover.

Have fun sewing!

Share:

Facebook
Twitter
Pinterest

Connect:

Picture of Jan Howell

Jan Howell

Whether it’s a new recipe, a fun craft, or some handy tips for your garden and home, I hope to empower and inspire you with skills that you can use to create joy, improved health, and to do it in a simple way.

Read More

DIY Dog Sweater: Simple Upcycled Sewing Project

Keep your pooch warm with style in an upcycled dog sweater. I know some dogs really don’t need a sweater to go outside, but they sure look cute don’t they? My border collie actually likes wearing a sweater, even though with all that fluff, he really doesn’t need it. However, there are some breeds of dogs that could use that extra layer in the cold winter months.

So if you have an old sweater kicking around, this is an easy sewing project that you can make in no time at all. Even a beginner seamstress can make this. I give instructions on how to make this with a regular sewing machine and a serger.

Here are a few before and after shots.

I suppose you could make a sweater for your cat as well.

 

You can use all types of sweaters. The top sweater was made using a cotton sweater and the little red and black one was made from a felted wool sweater. You can also use upcycled sweatshirts and regular fleece fabric as well.

Sizes included in the pattern:

*Measure around your pet’s chest. Breeds indicated are for reference only as breed sizes may vary.

dog sweater Items and Materials Needed

  • Pattern downloaded and printed.
  • Upcycled Sweater, or sweatshirt (fleece fabric could work as well)
  • Sewing machine, Serger (optional)
  • Pins
  • Scissors
  • 2 inch strip of fleece for binding (optional)

Watch the full video tutorial HERE

Play Video

You may also be interested in some other upcycled sweater projects, check them out HERE.

Let me know if you ever have any questions or comments below. I would love to see what you’re making! 

Have fun sewing!

Share:

Facebook
Twitter
Pinterest

Connect:

DIY Sewing Machine Bookbinding: Paper Meets Fabric

Two of my favorite materials to work with are unique PAPERS and FABRIC. In this DIY bookbinding tutorial, I am going to show you a project where the paper meets fabric. Bookbinding has always fascinated me and I have dappled in different ways to do it. In this post, I will be showing you how to bind a booklet using a sewing machine and how to apply a strip of fabric or (of course) a strip of an upcycled sweater.

I use this sewing method all the time when I make booklets to put in my traveler’s journal. Such a unique way to add charm to your planning!

It’s really quite simple, and of course, there is always a feeling of satisfaction that comes with it. The joy of making something with your own hands is what motivates those of us who like to diy (DO IT YOURSELF).

The thing is, if I’m going to spend time making something, it better be useful. These little booklets are very useful.

What do you use these booklets for?

bookbinding youmakeitsimple.com
  • Journals
  • Notes
  • Health journals (I print out a monthly health journal and this bookbinding method works like a charm).
  • Sketch booklet
  • Gifts

There are several ways to finish the binding edge: fabrics, felt, thin felted sweater, or nothing at all. There are times when I just bind the center without fabric like my health journals. These are something that I print out every month.

Items and things you’ll need for this DIY bookbinding project 

  • 7-10 sheets of paper (any size)
  • Cardstock cover paper (optional)
  • Sewing machine
  • Paper clips
  • Scissors
  • Extra sheet of paper that is cut the same size as your inner sheets for guide (I recommend using a paper that is a different color than the booklet paper, so you can have a contrast)
  • Durable needle for your machine (universal size 100, or denim needle works great)
  • Ruler
  • paper cutter (optional) I really like this one and have had it for years!
  • Exacto knife
  • Corner punch (optional)

Fabric Binding

  • Fabric strip cut to 1 ½ inches x length of booklet PLUS 1 inch
  • Heat & Bond (lite) cut the same as your fabric strip
  • Iron and ironing board

FELT OR SWEATER

  • A strip of felt or felted sweater cut 1 ¾ inch x length of booklet PLUS 1 inch (You don’t want the fabric to be too bulky or thick).

Bookbinding Instructions

Watch the Video Tutorial Here on YouTube

If using a printed calendar or planner pages, download, and print.

Cut paper to the desired size.

Fabric Style Binding

1 -Cut strip of fabric and Heat & Bond.

2-  Place fabric strip face down on the ironing board. Apply bonding strip with the bumpy side next to the fabric. Line up edges and press using an iron without steam.

3-  Let that cool while you sew the pages.
4-  Take your cover sheet (card stock) and place paper stack on top of that. (I recommend testing your sewing machine to see how much paper it will handle) Most machines are able to handle up to 7-10 sheets.

5-  Fold your guide sheet in half and place it on the left side of the paper stack. Line up edges and paperclip in place.

6-  Take it to the sewing machine and sew along the edge of the guide paper. Backstitch at the beginning and end of the seam. Clip threads

7-  Starting from the top sheet, start folding the papers in over to make a center crease. Do one side of the notebook and then the other.

You’ll notice that the inner pages will hang over a bit, no worries.

8- Take the Exacto knife and using a ruler, slice off the excess paper. It will take several passes to cut through all the layers.

9-  Pull off the paper strip from the Heat & Bond.  Fold the strip in half lengthwise and finger press to make a crease.

10-Slide the booklet inside leaving about ½ inch overhanging. Make sure it is against the edge and press in place. Flip it over and press the other side.

Cut excess fabric off with scissors.

UPCYCLED SWEATER OR FELT BOOKBINDING

1-  Take your calendar or paper stack and cut them in half.

(If using my printable calendars, fold the pages towards each other). If using plain paper sheets, arrange them so you have the outer cardstock on top and one on the bottom.

2-  Paper clip the top, right side, and bottom of the paper stack together, lining up the edges.

3-  Apply the right side of the sweater strip face down on the left side of the paper stack. Leave ½ on each end. Take it to the sewing machine and sew the fabric strip to the paper stack. Backstitch at the beginning and end of seam. Sew slowly making sure your machine can handle the thickness. Trim threads.

4-  Fold the fabric strip around the edge to the front.

5-  Keep the fabric pulled tight as you sew in “the ditch” of the previous seam. (Right next to the fabric edge) Backstitch at the beginning and end of seam.

6-  Flip over and using your scissors, trim away excess fabric right next to the seam. Be careful not to cut into the seam. Clip off the excess fabric on the ends as well.

If your sweater fabric was prewashed and “felted” it should not fray. Some thick knit fabrics will also not fray and can be used as well as fleece. Get creative.You can round the corners of the booklet using a corner punch. (Optional)

Ta-dah!

Now wasn’t that a fun little bookbinding project.

Be sure to check out my post about the 2020 printable calendars that I have designed and that work great for bookbinding!

Stay tuned for some more bookbinding techniques coming up!

Share:

Facebook
Twitter
Pinterest

Connect:

Picture of Jan Howell

Jan Howell

Whether it’s a new recipe, a fun craft, or some handy tips for your garden and home, I hope to empower and inspire you with skills that you can use to create joy, improved health, and to do it in a simple way.

Read More

Pixie & Pilot Caps Pattern with New Video Tutorial

DIY pIXIE CAP

Just in time for the cooler weather coming on, these cozy pixie & pilot caps are the perfect thing to keep your little ones ears nice and toasty!

Although this is not a new pattern release, I do have a NEW video tutorial to go along with it. I’m super excited to share it with you.

These whimsical, but most importantly functional pixie and pilot caps were designed to fit snug around the face and tie comfortably under the chin.

A cap for all seasons

Spring & Summer: For those days when the little ones just need a light covering, a cap made with cotton knit is the perfect thing.

Fall & Winter: An upcycled sweater or a cozy piece of fleece, are the perfect thing to make a pixie or pilot cap out of. 

If you would like the look of a hand knit hat for your child but you don’t knit, but you DO sew, this pixie & pilot cap pattern works great. Use the bottom cuff of a sweater and cut it out with the method I show in my pattern tutorial and it will hug around your child’s face just like you had knit it by hand.

These make really fun baby gifts!

Where do you get the pilot & pixie cap pattern?

You can get it here on my website or in my Etsy shop.

The pattern includes two different styles of caps: A functional pilot cap and a fun whimsy pixie cap.

Five different sizes from Newborn to a Child Size Small.

The cap uses very little fabric or sweater material. This one was made from an upcycled cotton sweater and the lining from an upcycled fleece jacket.

Lining the cap will make the cap REVERSIBLE and it’s so easy to do!

This is another opportunity to use some of your sweaters from your stash, if you have one.

If you are like me, once you start making things from upcycled sweaters, collecting second hand sweaters becomes an addiction.

Just think of all the combinations of colors and textures you can use to make some fabulous caps.

Pilot & Pixie Caps Soft and Cozy Binding

Using the method I showed in a previous post to bind the hat with fleece makes it cozy around the face and ties comfortably under the chin. 

HERE ARE SOME OTHER FUN HATS TO MAKE.

Upcycled Sweater Hat

Spiral Beanie

Fleece Animal Beanie

Christmas is just around the corner.

So dig into your sweater stash, or purchase a small amount of fleece and get sewing! 

*******Holiday sales are coming up and fleece can usually be found at an excellent price this time of year.

So grab your pattern and get sewing. 

Here is the video tutorial that will walk you through the process, step by step!

Play Video

Have fun sewing!

Share:

Facebook
Twitter
Pinterest

Connect:

Picture of Jan Howell

Jan Howell

Whether it’s a new recipe, a fun craft, or some handy tips for your garden and home, I hope to empower and inspire you with skills that you can use to create joy, improved health, and to do it in a simple way.

Read More

DIY Essential Oil Travel Case: Take your favorite oils with you

I love essential oils and use them frequently. They come in handy for all kinds of things around the house and for many physical and emotional ailments.

This charming, functional, and easy-to-make essential oil travel case allows you to access your favorite oils without taking up all the room in your purse. I love traveling with mine.

What are your favorite oils that you carry around?

Some of my favorite essential oils that I include in my travel case are:

Lavender Essential Oil

I think everyone needs to have a jar of Lavender Oil handy. Some of its benefits are:

  • It is widely used for its calming and relaxing qualities.
  •  Soothes occasional skin irritations.
  • Reduces the appearance of skin imperfections.
  • It helps to ease feelings of tension.
  • Add a few drops of lavender to pillows, bedding, or the bottoms of your feet for a restful night’s sleep.
  • Freshen your linen closet, mattress, car, or the air with a light mist of Lavender and water in a spray bottle.
  • Add to bath water to soak away stress or apply to the temples and the back of the neck.
  • Soothe and relieve symptoms from mild sunburns and burns.

 

Peppermint Essential Oil

Peppermint is not just for freshening your breath. Here are a few other things it is suitable for:

  •  Diffuse when feeling fatigued or low on energy.
  • Take one to two drops in a Veggie Capsule to alleviate occasional stomach upset.*
  • Promotes digestive health.*
  • Add two to three drops to your favorite smoothie recipe for a refreshing twist.
  • Place one drop in the palm of the hand with one drop of Wild Orange and one drop of Frankincense and inhale for a mid-day pick-me-up.
  • It helps reduce bloating, gas, and occasional indigestion.*
  • Add to cold water compress or foot bath to cool off when overheated.
  • Inhale for a non-stimulant, invigorating pick-me-up on long drives.
  • Add to shampoo or conditioner for a stimulating hair massage.
  • Repels bugs naturally—Spritz around windows and doors.
  • Diffuse during study time.
  • Apply topically to relieve feelings of tension.

 

Tea Tree Oil (melaleuca)

  • Apply 1–2 drops of Melaleuca essential oil onto the affected area for occasional skin irritations.
  • Combine 1–2 drops with your facial cleanser for added cleansing properties, or apply to skin after shaving.
  • Apply to fingernails and toenails after showering to purify and keep nails looking healthy.

I have used Tea Tree Oil (melaleuca), lemon, and clove in my cleaner recipes for over 15 years. Essential oils promote healthy immune function, protect against environmental and seasonal threats, help with skin irritations, and the list goes on and on. They smell great, are safe, and get the job done!

I use essential oils in my healing salve and deodorant recipes.

Anyway, I could go on and on about essential oils, and I will in future blog posts.  But for now, I just wanted to share this fun little travel purse you can make. It is nice to have your essential oils handy when you travel!

Mini Essential Oil Travel Case

essential oil case

In this case, you can fit up to TEN—5/8 dram bottles of essential oils. Taller bottles, like roller balls, will also fit in the wallet.

You can buy these cute little bottles HERE. 

I recommend getting these little pipettes to assist in filling your bottles.

Here is a quick story that I have to tell about an experience I had on the plane. I was flying to California and a lady sitting next to me was sneezing and wiping her nose constantly.  “GREAT, just what I need a cold”.  First of all, I quickly changed that fear of getting a cold, and then I reached in my purse and pulled out my little mini essential oil purse.  I got out my essential oil blend and put a few drops in my mouth, and didn’t worry any more about it.  NO COLD!

I am going to make a kit for each of my kids to keep in their car. These make excellent mini emergency kits and gifts!

Material & Items Needed

  • Sewing machine
  • Scissors
  • fabric or felted sweater scraps
  • Pins
  • 1 sheet of craft foam or thin cotton batting
  • Needle and thread
  • 1/8 inch braided elastic
  • Button or ribbon for closure
  • Masking tape

The finished purse measures approximately 3 ¾ inches x 4 inches and is 1 inch thick with bottles enclosed.

The easy-to-follow tutorial and pattern are available in my store or ETSY shop.  Only basic sewing skills and sewing supplies are needed.

I used a felted wool sweater for the inside fabric. It turned out quite nice!

get the pattern HERE

You may also be interested in this essential oil clutch pattern.

So, if you’re an essential oil lover, you’re going to love this little travel case!

Have fun sewing!

 

*These statements have not been evaluated by the Food and Drug Administration.
This product is not intended to diagnose, treat, cure, or prevent any disease.

 

Share:

Facebook
Twitter
Pinterest

Connect:

Picture of Jan Howell

Jan Howell

Whether it’s a new recipe, a fun craft, or some handy tips for your garden and home, I hope to empower and inspire you with skills that you can use to create joy, improved health, and to do it in a simple way.

Read More

DIY Bias Tape: Single and Double Fold Tutorial

Is there a project you’re making that calls for bias tape? 

I’m going to show you how simple it is to make your own unique single and double fold tape.

What is bias tape?

Bias tape is a long narrow strip of fabric that is cut on the bias.

What does “bias” mean?

The bias is a 45-degree angle across the weave of the fabric.

The fabric that is pulled “on the grain” does NOT stretch.

Fabric pulled “on the bias” stretches. That’s what is so wonderful about this stuff!

It curves and still lies flat when sewn.

 

What do you use it for?

You can use it around necklines, armholes, bind blanket edges, and just use it as a decorative trim.

You can also make an elastic casing with a wide bias tape.

There are two types of bias tape: single fold and double fold.

The reason to use one over the other is simply by preference.

Double fold is a little more durable because the fabric is doubled and will hold up better.

Good for binding blankets etc. When sewing clothing edges, a single fold is less bulky. It also comes in a variety of widths.

Why make your own?

You may be wondering why you would want to make your own when you can just easily go to the store and buy it. Well, there are several reasons to make your own.

One of the best things about making your own bias tape is that you can make it out of colorful prints! A printed trim adds so much character and really makes it pop.

Bias tape at the store only comes in solid colors, and might I add, a very limited assortment of colors.

There have been so many times when sewing up a project that I had to settle with a tape that that hardly matched the fabric I was working with.

Now I just make my own and can match it perfectly if needed.

Although, bias tape is fairly inexpensive at the store, making your own can save you a little money, and personally I find the process quite enjoyable!

 

Play Video

Here is a video tutorial showing you the whole process.

How to make your own bias tape

You can manually fold the bias tape, or you can use a bias tape maker. I will show you how to do it both ways.

However, this little gadget is one of the sweetest sewing tools EVER! It makes the job so much easier!

You can get the whole set for a very reasonable price HERE.

Materials and items needed:

  • Woven fabric (cotton, or cotton blends) I recommend using fat quarters or fabric cut to ½ yard.
  • Fat quarters are pre-cut fabric pieces that measures 18 x 20 inches. You can get them at any fabric or craft store.
  • Scissors
  • Bias Tape Maker (optional, but it makes the job soooooo much easier) LOVE THEM!
  • Rotary Cutter, Mat, Ruler
  • Sewing Machine
  • Iron

Although you can make several different sizes as indicated above, I am going to walk you through the process of making a 1” single fold and ½ inch double fold bias tape.

There are different sizes of bias tape makers, each a different color.  The packaged set did not come with instructions on how wide to cut the strips of fabric, which was very frustrating!

So hopefully this chart will simplify things and make it more clear for you.

Using a Fat quarter

Take your fat quarter piece of fabric and fold the bottom up so the side piece is aligned with the top edge. It will make a triangle.

 

Cut off the excess fabric on the side.

 

Cut along the diagonal crease.

Take the bottom right corner up to meet the top left corner, to make a smaller triangle. Flip the FOLDED EDGE so it is on the bottom, and the cut bias edge is now on the left.

 

Cut 2 inch strips (about 3-4 strips) and save the leftover for your scrap box.

sewing the strips together

To get one continuous strip of bias tape, you’ll need to sew the strips together.  NO PROBLEM!

As you can see you will end up with three different lengths of strips. You’ll want to mix them up so you don’t have a bunch of seams close together.

If using a ½ yard piece of fabric:

Square off one of the cut edges so you have a straight edge to work with. You’ll basically do the same thing but you will be working with a double layer of fabric and the strips will be longer.

Place one of the strips with the RIGHT SIDE FACING UP. Take another strip and place it RIGHT SIDE FACING DOWN on top of the other strip at a 45 degree angle. If it doesn’t line up like this, flip the strip and the other end will meet up.

Line up the edges and slide it up or down so it overhangs at least a 1/4 inch, as indicated above.

You will be sewing from the notched corner to the other notched corner. VERY IMPORTANT!

It doesn’t really matter how big the seam allowance is, but it does matter that you are sewing from those notched corners to notched corners.

I drew a line with a pen to show where the seam will be. ( You don’t have to mark it ).

Take it to the sewing machine and sew together. Back stitch at the beginning and end of the seam.

 

Clip off the little tags. Go to the end of the strip and add another one.

Continue until all strips are sewn together.

Using the bias tape maker

 

Poke the end of the fabric strip into the big end of the bias tape maker. (If the strip is cut at an angle, which it will be, it will be much easier to feed through the tool).

If it gets stuck, simply get a pin and stick it into the hole in the top and pull it out.

Start pulling the strip of fabric and it will automatically fold the ends over. SO COOL! Use the iron to press as you pull. USE THE STEAM SETTING to get a good creased edge.

***When you come to a seam, you may need to tug a little harder, but no big deal. Continue pulling and pressing until the whole strip is folded. 

That is SINGLE FOLD BIAS TAPE.

To make DOUBLE FOLD BIAS TAPE, simply fold it in half again and press.

Manually folding

To manually fold the tape, fold the tape in half first, then fold the edge up to the crease you just made.

Press. Then fold the top edge down to the halfway point and press. Then if you want double fold tape, fold it half again and press.

So that wasn’t hard, was it?

Oh, the fun things you can embellish with a cute printed strip of bias tape.

This is a blanket bound with a strip of printed double fold bias tape.

 

Although you usually use a cotton fabric to make bias tape, you can also make trim with knit fabric. This is a t-shirt that I just added a strip of knit binding over the existing neck ribbing. Cute Hugh?

 

So many fun things you can do.

I hope this opened your eyes up to a whole new world of bias tape.

 

Don’t settle for the drab and boring tape at the store, MAKE YOUR OWN!

You got this!

Have fun sewing,

 

Share:

Facebook
Twitter
Pinterest

Connect:

Picture of Jan Howell

Jan Howell

Whether it’s a new recipe, a fun craft, or some handy tips for your garden and home, I hope to empower and inspire you with skills that you can use to create joy, improved health, and to do it in a simple way.

Read More

Sewing Machine Needles: Why Choosing the Right One Matters

sewing machine needles pin

You may think that the type of sewing machine needles that you’re using in your machine doesn’t really matter, but it does! Using the right sewing machine needle size and type for the project can mean the difference between broken threads, skipped stitches and a  professional looking seam.

I thought for years that the reason I was getting a “bad stitch” was because there was something wrong with my machine. Not so.

One day I was doing a little research on needles and read how using a “sharp” needle will give you a nice straight stitch when topstitching. So I switched my needle to a sharp needle, and BAM I got a beautiful straight stitch.

I was considering buying a new sewing machine, thinking mine had serious problems, when all I had to do was use the right type of needle! That piece of information saved me a few bucks.

So choosing the right needle does matter!

How do I choose the right sewing machine needles?

It’s all about the needle type and size.

You’ll select the needle type by what kind of fabric you are sewing on (i.e. knit vs. woven).

The needle size is determined by the thickness and weight of the fabric.

 

sewing tips SEWING MACHINE NEEDLES

Needle Types

I am going to go over some of the most common needle types. (Don’t let all this information overwhelm you. It really is quite simple).

Universal Needles

As the name suggests, universal needles are the most commonly used needle. They can be used with woven fabrics, synthetics and some knit fabrics. This is the type of needle I use for 90 % of my sewing. The finer needles are mostly used for lightweight fabrics. Larger sizes are used on medium to heavyweight fabrics. I recommend staying stocked up on a good basic Universal needle. There are variety packs that include sizes 70-90, like the one pictured above.

Ball point

Ball point needles are similar to a universal needle but it has a more rounded tip, which pushes the fabric fibers apart rather than cutting them. This makes ball point needles ideal for working with tightly woven, rib knits, interlock, cotton knits, fleece, and double knit.

Jersey

Jersey needles are a standard ball point needle specifically for knit fabric (t-shirt fabric). If when using a jersey needle you experience stitch skipping, you will want to switch to a stretch needle.

Stretch

Stretch needles, often confused with Jersey needles, are also a medium ballpoint tip. These needles are good for extremely 2 way stretchy fabrics like spandex and elastic. If you’re sewing swimwear, grab this type of needle for sure.

Leather

Leather needles are often known as chisel point needles thanks to a point that looks and acts like a chisel when in use. These needles should be used with genuine leather, suede and difficult to sew projects, but should not be used with imitation leather, ultra suede or synthetic suede since the characteristics of these fabrics are quite different.

Quilting

Quilting needles are designed to be used with several layers of fabric because of their reinforced shaft.

Sharps

This needle has a sharp point and narrow shaft for piercing woven fabric.  Works best on finely woven fabric like chintz, silk, light weight faux suede, and microfiber. They are also great for heirloom sewing or any other type of topstitching.

Topstitching

The extra large eye, large groove, and sharp point make it perfect for heavy decorative threads, like embroidery thread, or even two strands of all purpose thread. Use this needle anytime you have stitches visible on the outside of your project for a neat, clean look.

Denim

Denim Needles have a sharp point and strong shaft. These needles can stitch through many layers without breaking. Use on heavy, tightly woven fabric, like denim, canvas, and duck.

Twin

Twin needles have a single shaft connecting two needles. This is often used when you want two perfectly matching stitches. This is a common seam for jeans and decorative stitching. Your machine must be twin needle capable, with two separate thread spools and a wide enough needle plat. They are available in Denim, Stretch, Embroidery, Metallic, and Universal. These work well for topstitching t-shirt hems.

 

Sewing Machine Needles Sizes

So what are those numbers shown on the packages of needles? I am embarrassed to admit that until just recently I didn’t understand what they meant. I knew it had to do something with the size.

If you look at most needle packaging they will have 2 numbers on them with a / to divide them. For example ( 80/12). The smaller number relates to the American system and ranges from 8 to 20 and the larger number is for the European system and ranges from 60 to 120. Who knew?

What sewing machine needles size do you use for what projects?

The numbers represent the thickness of the fabric that you are able to sew with the needle. The larger the numbers the thicker the fabric you can sew. Common sizes are 60/8, 70/10, 75/11, 80/12, 90/14 and 100/16

I have created a sewing machine needle guide that will hopefully help you figure out what type of needle will suit the sewing project you’re working on. (Look for the download link below) What do the colors on the needle shaft mean?

 

You may have wondered what the little color stripes painted on the shaft of the needle mean. The top color indicates the needle type and the bottom color indicates the needle size

 

You will find variations of the same color in different brands but ultimately, this is the chart:

  • Universal – no color code
  • Ball point – medium blue
  • Jersey – orange or light brown
  • Stretch – Yellow
  • Jeans – dark blue
  • Microtex – purple
  • Leather – brown
  • Universal twin – red shaft
  • Stretch twin – blue shaft
  • Quilting – green

 

I love having a copy of this chart in my wallet for those times when I need to purchase a new needle. You can laminate the charts to make them last longer.

I have made the PDF available for you to download and print for FREE!

This PDF includes THREE different size charts.

  • 1 LARGE – to hang in your sewing room.
  • 1 MEDIUM
  • 2 SMALL – to keep handy in your purse or even your wallet.

How long do sewing machine needles last?

Ideally, you should change your needle beginning of each project. But if that’s a little too much, the best practice is to change the needle about every 10 hours of continuous sewing.

If you accidentally hit a pin when sewing, then you should change the needle immediately as you will have damaged the tip and you won’t get a good stitch and may even mess up your bobbin.

What brand is the best when it comes to sewing machine needles?

Every seamstress may have their favorite brand or if you’re like me, they all seem to work just fine.  I don’t think you can go wrong with a Schmetz needle. They offer such a large variety. Schmetz needles are of such good quality you’ll find that changing the needle every 10 hrs of sewing is not quite necessary, the needles still look and feel amazing! You should still change the needles though as they might get damaged when you’re in the middle of your next project or 10 hrs round.

How to store and manage your sewing machine needles

Do you ever change needles and just stick it in your pin cushion or on your sewing cabinet? Then weeks later wonder what size or type of needle it is?

I do this all the time and end up just pitching it because I don’t want to be using the wrong needle. They do engrave that information on the needle itself, however you’ll need a magnifying glass to be able to read it.

So I have started marking the needle when I take it out of the machine with a little piece of masking tape. Works like a charm.

 

sewing machine needle tin

I store my needles in a recycled Altoids Mint tin.

I hope this was helpful!

When I started using the correct needle for the project at hand; it did make a huge difference in my sewing results, and I didn’t have to buy a new sewing machine. LOL.

Want some hand sewing tips? Check out this post showing you some basic hand-sewing stitches.

Have fun sewing my friends,

Share:

Facebook
Twitter
Pinterest

Connect:

It’s Poncho Time: Upcycled Sweater Project

It’s poncho time. Keep your little kids toasty warm this winter season with a poncho. 

Whether your littles are playing, at school, or just hanging out at home, a poncho is a great lightweight covering that isn’t too bulky or constricting.

These ponchos are super easy to make from upcycled sweaters and all kinds of fleece.

upcycled sweater

Dress it up with a soft fleece flower, decorative trims, or other fun embellishments.

upcycled sweater

I put a few of my felted wool sweater balls on this one.

upcycled sweater

Mix and match colors to create a one-of-a-kind, whimsical, fun, playful poncho they will love wearing.

upcycled sweater
upcycled sweater

The neck binding is easy to sew and made with cozy fleece that fits comfortably and easily over the head.

upcycled sweater

Just think of all the different color combinations and fun contrasting neck bindings you can create.

upcycled sweater
upcycled sweater

The patterns are available here on my site or in my Etsy shop. Sizes 6 months to girls’ size 14 are available.

upcycled sweater

For those of you who would like to wear something a little whimsical and fun yourself, you can get the women’s poncho pattern HERE ON MY SITE SHOP or HERE in my Etsy shop.

These make fun Christmas gifts for your littles! This really is a quick, easy project.

Get out your sweater stash and make ponchos.

For sweater upcycling tips and know-how, check out my FREE online course HERE.

upcycled sweater
Picture of Jan Howell

Jan Howell

Whether it’s a new recipe, a fun craft, or some handy tips for your garden and home, I hope to empower and inspire you with skills that you can use to create joy, improved health, and to do it in a simple way.

Read More

DIY Fabric Window Treatment

Add some pizzazz and color to any room by making your own window treatment. This is a fun and easy project that even a beginner seamstress can handle.

A few years back we remodeled our home and added some space onto the back. One of the things we added was a new laundry room. I am a total light freak and love the lighting in this room, and I love that I don’t have to go into the dreary basement anymore to do laundry.

There are two windows in the corner of my laundry room and in my door. I wanted to add some color to the crisp white planked walls with some kind of window treatment.

At first, I thought about making roman blinds for these windows. I have made them before and they are kinda fun to make, but I am into EASY these days, and a roman blind looks like this when it is pulled up anyway. Why should I waste the fabric yardage, my time, and any frustration that may come along with a more intense project such as a pleated roman blind?

This window treatment works really well for windows that are inset, meaning they are not flush with the interior walls.

Here is a picture of the laundry room before the window treatment.

After

Look at what a LITTLE fabric and a LITTLE bit of time can do!

While I was sewing I thought I would take some photos and share with you how QUICK and EASY this was to make up.

What you will need for this easy DIY window treatment:

  • FABRIC  (measuring instructions below) I used a duck cloth piece of fabric for this window, which is a little like canvas. Any woven fabric will work. If it is a thinner, lightweight fabric you may want to use a piece of interfacing to give it some structure.
  • SEWING MACHINE
  • a piece of wood trim measuring 3/4 x 1/2 inch x window width. (measuring instructions below)
  • drill
  • 1 5/8 inch screws
  • 7/16 inch dowel the width of your treatment (optional)
  • staple gun or glue adhesive
  • rotary cutter or scissors
  • safety pins (optional)

How to measure fabric:

Measure the INSIDE MOUNT width of the window and ADD 1 INCH for seam allowance.

Then decide how long you want the valance to hang down and double that amount then ADD 1 1/2 inches. Mine hangs down 10 inches. So I cut my fabric 21 1/2 inches.

Cutting Out:

Cut out the fabric using a rotary cutter or scissors.

*TIP: use a safety pin to mark the edges of the fabric that are the WINDOW WIDTH measurements. I suggest this because it can be real easy to get these mixed up especially if you have a square window.

Sewing:

Fold the fabric with Right Sides Together with the WIDTH of the fabric at the top. (safety pins should be at the top)

Sew the side seams using a 1/2 inch seam allowance. Clip the bottom corners.

Turn and Press:

Turn the fabric inside out and press the edges out real smooth.

Hold the fabric up and if you feel it hangs nicely you can move on. If you find it doesn’t hang flat you can either stiffen it up a bit using some iron-on interfacing or use the method below using a small dowel.

*TIP: If you are using a lightweight fabric, you can insert a small dowel (7/16) cut the width minus about a 1/4 inch into the bottom of the valance.  This will give it some weight to hang down straight instead of being limp.

Finish the top edge to prevent fraying with a serger, or on a regular machine just use a zigzag stitch.

Board Preparation:

You will need to drill some holes in the wood strip before applying the fabric. Measure about 3 1/2 -4 inches from the edges and one hole in the center.  If your window is pretty wide, you may need a few more holes to secure the wood strip tightly to the top of the window casing. If you have a countersinking tool, that works great, if not, no biggie.

The holes that you drill should coincide with the screws you are using.

Applying the fabric to the wood strip:

 

Line up the top edge of the fabric with the edge of the wood strip and make sure the fabric is also lined up with the side edge of the wood or else the wood will show.

Hold securely in place while you staple it using a staple gun. If you do not have a staple gun, you can secure in place using a good adhesive and some clamps to hold in place while it dries.

You may need to use a hammer to flatten any stubborn staples that didn’t get stapled flat.

Inserting the window treatment to the window casing:

Get a drill and 1 5/8 inch screws handy.

The wood strip and fabric should fit snug against the edges of your casing. You may want some help doing this part if you have a wide window.

Fold the fabric up while you, or someone else, screws in the screws. (Keep the wood strip flush with the wall edges).

Tadah! Gotta love it, baby.

What a fun way to add some pizzazz to any room.

non-toxic laundry room

Want a tour of my laundry room? Check out this post.

Let me know if you have any questions.

Have fun sewing!

jan3

Share:

Facebook
Twitter
Pinterest

Connect:

Fleece Binding Sewing Tutorial

fleece binding

I love using fleece to bind the edges of a lot of my upcycled sweater sewing projects. Like sweater slippers, hats and cozy blankets. This fleece binding technique is so easy and it makes the finished edge look so sharp and crisp.

So without further chit chat, let’s get to it.

Play Video

Choosing the binding fabric

The great thing about using fleece fabric is that is DOES NOT FRAY! You can use a knit fabric as long it is doesn’t have too much cotton in it. If the knit has a lot of cotton, it will fray.

If you have a knit shirt that you don’t wear anymore, but you like the color or print, reuse for binding! I do it all the time.

You can test the fabric by cutting a strip and then pull and stretch it. If the edges fray, then it won’t work for binding. If it doesn’t fray, you are good to go.

Bulky fleece, like Polar fleece tends to be a little too bulky. Have fun mixing up colors and prints with your projects.

Cutting out fleece strips

Cut out strips of fleece (on the stretch) 2 – 2 1/2 inches by however long you need for your project.

If you don’t have a fleece piece long enough, no worries, you can join several strips together. I will show you how easy it is.

Joining strip together

 

Place the strips Right Sides Together (RST) and overlap the edge by 1/4
inch. Make sure the top piece is on the right side as shown above.

Stitch from point to point as indicated in photo. I just eyeball it, but if you needed to, you could mark the edge with a piece of masking tape.

Back stitch at the begging and end of the seam.

Trim the seam leaving a 1/4 inch seam allowance.

Now clip the edges.

Finger press the seam open.

Ta dah, now you have one continuous strip of binding.

This technique alleviates the bulk that you would get with a straight seam.

It offsets the seams so they are not all in one place and still gives you the bias stretch.

Fleece binding application

Sew, using a 1/4 -3/8 inch seam allowance. (Which is usually the edge of your pressure foot) Stretch as you sew.

Back stitch at the beginning and end of the seam.

If your binding is going to be on the thinner side, trim the edges.

Finger press the seam towards the binding.

Fold the binding to the width you want over the the inside.

Pin in place.

Stitch IN THE DITCH of the previous seam.

You will have extra fabric.

CAREFULLY trim the excess fabric close to the seam. Be very careful not to clip the fabric underneath. I have sadly done this.

Now wasn’t that a snap!

Look how nice and even and crisp the edges are.

Whether it is a cozy blanket or a pair of sweater slippers that you need to bind, get out your fleece and give it a whirl.

Learn how to make and bind your own mini weekly planner with these cozy sweater strips.

Any questions or suggestions, please, let’s chat.

Have fun sewing!
 
Be sure to check out my TEACHABLE SITE for classes and tutorials, and my YouTube station.
 

Share:

Facebook
Twitter
Pinterest

Connect:

Picture of Jan Howell

Jan Howell

Whether it’s a new recipe, a fun craft, or some handy tips for your garden and home, I hope to empower and inspire you with skills that you can use to create joy, improved health, and to do it in a simple way.

Read More

The Joy of Making and Wearing an Apron

Do you wear an apron? It seems that not many people wear aprons anymore.

Could it be because not many people take the time to cook, or is it because they don’t want to bother putting one on? 

Personally, I get a lot of joy from making and wearing an apron!

 

What comes to your mind when you think about aprons?

I think about

  • bright colored cotton prints
  • my grandmother making something yummy in the kitchen
  • and SEWING.

Why sewing? One of my first sewing projects was probably an apron.

I don’t think my mother or grandmother ever purchased one from the store, an apron was just something you made.

apron

I wear a full apron for cooking and a half apron for cleaning, puttering, and crafting.

For some, wearing an apron may remind them of work or drudgery. For me, (and hopefully for you), it means something wonderful is about to be CREATED…something yummy to eat, a new project or just tidying up the house – all good stuff.

This may sound kinda crazy, but when I put my apron on, something happens within.

I just feel ready- ready to get things done, ready for inspiration, and I feel empowered.

Does anyone else feel this way?

Full Apron

A full apron is usually worn to protect clothing when cooking.

I have ruined a lot of clothing when that dreaded splash of sauce or grease jumped out of the pan onto my shirt or pants.

GET THE REVERSIBLE FULL-SIZE APRON PATTERN HERE. (Child Sizes come with the pattern).

These keeping house aprons are great for vendors to wear at craft shows.

Half Aprons/Utility Aprons

Aprons with pockets are used to keep things handy when working on projects.

These utility aprons, (KEEPING HOUSE APRONS), is what I call them, are my very favorite to wear!

I wear them around the house most days and am tempted to wear them out and about.

Don’t ya think they add a unique, hip, shabby chic look when worn over a pair of jeans or skirt?

GET THE PATTERN HERE.

I love wearing these around the house because

  • I can keep my cell phone handy, not only for calls and texts, but I like listening to music or a podcast.
  • Keep tissue handy
  • Hold, and keep handy, all my important tools (cell phone, ipod, vacuum attachments, scissors, garden tools, pens, pencils, calculator, dog treats, etc.
  • Great for all those miscellaneous items you find on the floor while vacuuming!

Aprons are not just to be worn indoors. I use my “keeping house” apron when I work in the garden and it came in real handy when shingling our roof several years ago. (Perfect for holding nails, my cell phone, and measuring tape.

My son and I on top of the roof. Ripping off old shingles. Notice my handy keeping house apron.

Aprons make great wedding and shower gifts!

I like making and giving aprons for wedding shower gifts.

One particular time I was too busy to make an apron for a gift.

I looked everywhere to find an apron that I could buy.

I had a hard time finding one. The specialty cooking stores had a few, but not quite what I wanted and they were quite pricey.

Making an apron for yourself or to give as a gift is very easy and inexpensive. It is fun to put a set of dishtowels, a cooking gadget, or a copy of one of your favorite recipes with the apron.

By the way, aprons are not just for women. I know a lot of men who like wearing them when they are doing the manly barbecue thing.

If you sew, go to your fabric stash or purchase a cute piece of woven cotton fabric and go to town.

These aprons are a fun, easy sewing project.

You’ll only need two yards of woven fabric for lined FULL APRON or just 1 yard if using a thicker cotton fabric. One yard is needed for the HALF style.

You can get the full-size PDF pattern here.

 

Mix colors, prints, and textures, and add trim and embellishments to make a fun authentic, one-of-a-kind APRON.

The combinations are endless. No need to spend a lot of money on fancy fabrics or trims. Use what you have.

If you don’t wear an apron, I suggest you give it a whirl! You will love it!

Happy cleaning, cooking, and dancing!

jan3

Share:

Facebook
Twitter
Pinterest

Connect:

Picture of Jan Howell

Jan Howell

Whether it’s a new recipe, a fun craft, or some handy tips for your garden and home, I hope to empower and inspire you with skills that you can use to create joy, improved health, and to do it in a simple way.

Read More

Felt Flower Wrist Corsage

felt flower wrist corsage
felt flower wrist corsage

It’s time for the prom, spring dances, and Mother’s day is just around the corner. Why not give a wrist corsage that is made from the heart. I posted years ago about this felt flower wrist corsage and I think it’s time for an update.

This is how this wrist corsage came about: My son who is quite the artist and who likes to be original and unique decided that he wanted to make his date’s corsage for the senior prom. So we got out the felt and ribbon and had a fun late night experimenting. This is the felt flower wrist corsage we came up with.

felt flower wrist corsage

Sam embroidered the leaf. (Yes, this is my tough rock climbing, lacrosse-playing, ski freak boy)  You gotta love him!

We sewed a nice black ribbon to the back of the flowers so you could tie a bow around her wrist.

felt flower wrist corsage

I wish I had a better picture of it. Turned out pretty cute, didn’t’ it? This was a fun easy project.

Felt Flower Wrist Corsage
There are so many fun different flowers you can make with felt and fleece. You can get the patterns for all these flowers HERE in my shop.
 
The pattern includes instructions on how to make
  • Fleece Daisy
  • Fleece Rose
  • Felt Mum Flower
  • Felt Daisy
  • Fleece Cone Flower
  • Felt Rose
  • Instructions for the wrist corsage, brooch, or pin corsage.

Sew a pin to the back to make a brooch.

 Here is a FREE TUTORIAL on how to make some fun coneflowers from fleece.
Felt Flower Wrist Corsage
Have fun sewing!
 
Picture of Jan Howell

Jan Howell

Whether it’s a new recipe, a fun craft, or some handy tips for your garden and home, I hope to empower and inspire you with skills that you can use to create joy, improved health, and to do it in a simple way.

Read More

Sweater Mittens – Easy Sewing Project for Your Favorite Valentine!

sweater mittens

Valentine’s day is upon us and these sweater mittens are a great sewing project for your favorite Valentine!

Keep your hands warm with style!

For those of you who follow me, you know how much I love making things with upcycled wool sweaters. Mittens are one of my most favorite things to make.

I have two different mitten patterns. One is for adults and a large child. The other pattern is for children and infants. The patterns are in PDF format and you can download them INSTANTLY.

Not sure which size you will need? Check out this post which will help you measure the hand you are sewing to get the correct size.

sweater mittens size chart

Adult Size sweater mitten pattern

The pattern includes adult sizes XS, S, M, L, XL, XXL, and XX small (child size large).

Infant & Child sweater mitten pattern

We can’t forget the little hands!

Same cozy design as the adult sizes, but this pattern has been modified for small hands, including a basic infant mitten without the thumbs. Made for hands smaller than 5 inches.

Where can you get the sweater mitten patterns?

The easy-to-follow, printable sweater mittens pattern can be purchased here in my SHOP, or in my Etsy shop.
 

Is it easier for you to learn by watching a video tutorial?

I’ve got you covered with this video tutorial! I have three platforms where this video is available.
  •  Skillshare. Read more about it here. (Skillshare membership required).
  • YouTube  
 
For information on how to measure your hand correctly, you can check out the post here.
 
If you are interested in making some other upcycled sweater projects, you can check these out.
 
 
Picture of Jan Howell

Jan Howell

Whether it’s a new recipe, a fun craft, or some handy tips for your garden and home, I hope to empower and inspire you with skills that you can use to create joy, improved health, and to do it in a simple way.

Read More

diy Travel Tissue Pouch: From an Upcycled Sweater

tissue pouch
Play Video

I think all women carry tissue in their purse, right? Why not carry your tissue in style? This travel tissue pouch is so easy and quick to make. What’s even better is that they are so cute made up using an upcycled sweater! I could make different color combinations all day. So fun!

The contrasting fabric lining, which also becomes the trim, looks real unique next to the texture of a felted sweater. You CAN make this with regular fabric if you choose, however, if you have felted sweater pieces kicking around, USE THEM!

This is like a 30 minute project. Oh what fun gifts these would make. (Valentine’s Day is coming right up)!

what you need

tissue pouch instructions

  1. Using pattern piece “A” cut out one using felted sweater.

  2. Cut out one, pattern piece “B” using a contrasting fabric.

3. Place pieces right sides together. Pin short ends in place.

4. Pin the other side (There will be some sagging, don’t worry about it). This is what will create the trim.

5. Sew the seams, 1/4 ” seam allowance (Back stitch at the beginning and end of seam)

 

6. Turn inside out. Flip the seams towards the outside, even the trim allowance and press in place.

 

7. Fold in half lengthwise and mark the center point with a pin.

 

8. With the sweater side facing up, fold one side toward the center. (Line up edge with center point).

 

9. Fold the other side over the top, lining up binding in the center.

 

10. Allow the BINDING EDGES to extend out past the edge. (This will keep the flaps tight and not floppy). Pin in place.

 

11. Using a 1/4″ seam, sew the side edges. Do this with both sides.

 

12. Clip corners, making sure to NOT cut into the seam!

13. Trim edges.

 

14. Turn inside out and poke out corners using blunt end of scissors or eraser end of a pencil.

Tips for filling your tissue pouch

You can get these cute little tissue packets at most grocery stores or on Amazon.

To make it easier to get the tissue out of your pouch……….

 

  • Remove the “lift” tab on the tissue package. 
  • Take a strip of Scotch tape and place it down the middle (taping the flap closed).
  • Using a pair of scissors, cut down the center of the tape to create a new straight opening.
  • Insert the tissue packet into the pouch.

BAM! You’re finished. Now wasn’t that easy and fun.

Have fun sewing!

 

Share:

Facebook
Twitter
Pinterest

Connect:

Upcycled Sweater Hearts

I love Valentine’s Day!

Here is another idea for you to use up some of your old sweaters, and better yet, the scraps from your other upcycled projects.

These sweater hearts are way easy to make, you’ll have a bunch made up in no time.

The pattern comes with directions and a pattern for both the regular heart and patchwork heart.  

Upcycled Sweater Hearts

Cut out fabric pieces using sweaters of your choice.

Upcycled Sweater Hearts

With Right Sides Together (RST) sew piece 1 to piece 2.  Open that up and place pattern piece 3 (RST) and sew together.

If you want to hang your sweater hearts, baste a ribbon, jute, or thick string on the right side of the heart back piece.

Gather the string or ribbon up and pin it in the center of the heart, so it won’t get caught in the seam.

Place the pieced heart top to the bottom piece (RST) and pin in place.  Sew all the way around leaving about a 2″ opening to stuff the heart.

Turn inside out and stuff firmly.

With a needle and thread, slip stitch opening closed.

Ta Dah!

Sew a bunch up for all your Valentine’s, or just fill a basket full of hearts for a fun holiday decoration!

 

Here are some other fun DIY Valentine gift ideas.

Share:

Facebook
Twitter
Pinterest

Connect:

Picture of Jan Howell

Jan Howell

Whether it’s a new recipe, a fun craft, or some handy tips for your garden and home, I hope to empower and inspire you with skills that you can use to create joy, improved health, and to do it in a simple way.

Read More

DIY Fabric Jingle Ball Cat and Baby Toy

This little fabric jingle ball cat and baby toy is the perfect size for little hands AND little paws.  Recycled sweaters, a few jingle bells and a little stuffing is all you need. However, if you want to make the CAT really happy, you can add a little catnip while stuffing. The cats go crazy.

cat and baby toy

I posted earlier this summer on how to make the larger sized balls. This is the same process, however, the pieces are just smaller. You can download the pattern for all sizes FREE HERE.

Here is a little quick video on the process of making the fabric jingle ball. For full written instructions, check out the post here.

Play Video

What you need

  • 8 small pieces of sweaters (You can use felted wool sweaters, cotton, fleece, and even regular knit fabric.
  • 1/4 cup Catnip herb (optional)
  • needle and thread
  • sewing machine (can be sewn by hand)
  • scissors
  • pattern

If you want to bring a smile to your kitty cat, dog or baby, there is still time to whip up a little fabric jingle ball for Christmas.

Jingle ball instructions

Make sure you are saving your felted sweater scraps. These balls are the perfect thing to make with your scraps.

Have fun sewing!

Share:

Facebook
Twitter
Pinterest

Connect: